2016 Dodge Challenger SRT/Hellcat Owner`s Manual

2016 Dodge Challenger SRT/Hellcat Owner`s Manual
2016
OWNER’S MANUAL
Challenger
SRT/Hellcat
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanyour satisfaction.
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
VIN Location
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located
number also appears on the Automobile Information on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartDisclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the ment.
vehicle registration, and the title.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ SRT Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .24
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .25 䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . .
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . .
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
䡵 SRT ENGINE BREAK-IN
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .42
. . . . . . . .42
. . . . . . . .44
. . . . . . . .55
. . . . . . . .71
. . . . . . . .90
. . . . . . . .90
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ AUTO-Down Feature — If Equipped . . . . . . . .39
▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the
push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
transmitter and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Keyless Push Button Ignition
Key Fob against the engine START/STOP button and
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with push to operate the ignition.
the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
ON/RUN will illuminate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
SRT Key Fobs
NOTE: SRT vehicles equipped with the 6.2L Supercharged engine comes with three key fobs (two red and
one black) that allow for different engine power levels.
Please refer to the ⬙Drive Modes⬙ in the “Uconnect
Settings” section for further descriptions.
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to
remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the
chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display
in the cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
(Continued)
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, place the ignition
in the OFF position and lock all doors when leaving
the vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Push Button
Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are
programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine
to crank if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron- been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
Replacement Keys
as possible by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
CAUTION!
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
(Continued)
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a 2. This device must accept any interference received,
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
including interference that may cause undesired opis one that has never been programmed.
eration.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys- NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
tem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the by the party responsible for compliance could void the
authorized dealer.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
To Arm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
and trunk for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and
And Operating⬙ for further information).
decklid release are disabled. If something triggers the
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the folmake sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
lowing audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse,
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
the headlights will turn on, park lamps and/or turn
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF, and the
signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the
key is physically removed from the ignition.
instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the system will turn off the horn after approximately 29 seconds, turn off all of the visual signals after
5 seconds, and then the system will rearm itself up to 8
times.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in NOTE:
⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for • The driver’s door key cylinder and the Trunk button
further information).
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power trunk entry. Pushing the trunk button will not
3. If any doors are open, close them.
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters
To Disarm The System
the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door, the
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
alarm will sound.
the following methods:
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
equipped, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in ⬙Things To system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previKnow Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further infor- ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
mation).
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
• Advance the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors — if equipped. Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the “Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position).
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
(extreme bottom position).
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Headlight Illumination On Approach
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
equipped through Uconnect. To change the current setThis feature lets you program the system to unlock either
ting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under- To Lock The Doors
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitFlash Lights With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash, and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
Instrument Panel” for further information.
(24 km/h) or greater.
To Unlatch The Trunk
NOTE:
Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before
horn will remain on.
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
by the system.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, Programming Additional Transmitters
and the interior lights will turn on.
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Using The Panic Alarm
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
Emergency Key Removal
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
2. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal, if
other hand.
equipped, and gently prying the two halves of the
RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
seal during removal.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together, reposition and secure the screw as
shown in step #2 for removal.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign 2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opon the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
eration.
Separating Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Transmitter
Case
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved NOTE:
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
distance, check for these two conditions:
reduce this range.
• A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
How To Use Remote Start
the battery is a minimum of three years.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
• Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
engine will remote start:
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
• Shift lever in PARK
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• Doors closed
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve- • Hood closed
niently from outside the vehicle while still • Hazard switch off
maintaining security. The system has a range of
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• RKE PANIC button not pushed
Remote Start Abort Message
• System not disabled from previous remote start event The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
• Vehicle security alarm not active
start prematurely:
• Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go)
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The instrument cluster message stays active until the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
lights will flash, and horn will chirp twice (if
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute Vehicle
cycle.
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present, the vehicle will start and NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
then shut down 10 seconds later.
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Start request.
Remote Start mode.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
in the Remote Start mode.
doors, or unlock the vehicle using Passive Entry via the
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with door handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
activated by pushing the START/STOP button twice push and release the START/STOP button.
(or the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter- DOOR LOCKS
N-Go feature, the message “Remote start active - Push
Manual Door Locks
start button” will display in the Driver Information
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
Display (DID) until you push the START button.
trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the door
Cancel Remote Start
lock knob on each door trim panel upward.
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
occur:
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm.
• Any engine warning lights come on.
• Low Fuel Light turns on.
• The hood is opened.
• The hazard switch is pushed.
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK.
• The brake pedal is pushed.
Door Lock Knob
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is on, and either door is open, the power locks will not
operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the
Key Fob in the vehicle. Turning off the ignition or closing
the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open
with the ignition either cycled to ACC or RUN (engine
not running), a chime will sound as a reminder.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
Power Door Lock Switch
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer or through the Uconnect Settings in
your radio.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically if:
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en- KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO
abled.
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
3. The transmission is in PARK.
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
4. The driver door is opened.
NOTE:
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry door handle
and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle
will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security
alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the driver door handle, grab the front driver door
handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically. The
interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is
unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m)
search in any passive entry vehicle.
of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger
door handle to unlock both doors automatically. The 1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter while a door is ajar.
interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is
unlocked.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is ajar.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
the door is ajar.
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
When any of these situations occur, after all ajar doors are
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
Transmitter In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car, and it does
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters outside the
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the car, the car will unlock and alert the customer.
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition is in the
OFF position.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
To Enter The Trunk:
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m)
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitof the deck lid, push the button located on the center of
ters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
the light bar which is located on the deck lid above the
deck lid.
license plate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock both
doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
2
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control both of
the door windows.
Power Window Switches
There is a single window control on the passenger’s door
trim panel that operates the window on the passenger’s
door. The window controls will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE:
• The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power
windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when
either front door is opened. The time for this feature is
programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• The door window will lower slightly if it is closed
completely when opening the door. The window will
return to its fully closed position after closing the door.
This action allows the door to open without resistance
AUTO-Down Feature — If Equipped
and prevents window and seal damage.
The driver’s door power window switch and passenger
door power window switch have an AUTO-down feature. Push the window switch to the second detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To open the window part way, push the window switch NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
to the first detent and release it when you want the button will operate. If equipped with a manual transmission, the vehicle speed must be under 5 mph (8 km/h)
window to stop.
before the button will operate.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
The trunk lid can be released from
outside the vehicle by pushing the
The power window switches will remain active for up to
Trunk Release button on the Re10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
mote Keyless Entry (RKE) transOpening either door will cancel this feature. The time for
mitter twice within five seconds
this feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Setor by using the external release
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
switch located on the underside of
further information.
the decklid overhang. The release
feature will function only when
Trunk Release
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
Button
the vehicle is in the unlock
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
condition.
pushing the Trunk Release button. The button is located
on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
WARNING!
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open sym- through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
bol will display until the trunk is closed.
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
heat stroke.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Trunk Emergency Release
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In
the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk,
the trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark
handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
Trunk Emergency Internal Release
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
shoulder belts properly.
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
Air Bags room to inflate.
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chilside air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
dren who do not use child restraints or beltbetween occupants and the door and occupants could
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
be injured.
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
them or under their arm.
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even Initial Indication
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
turned to the START or ON/RUN position, an intermithappen far away from home or on your own street.
tent chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON/RUN
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and Change Of Status
remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
belts are buckled again.
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un- when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning and cargo is properly stowed.
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho- will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti- vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed
position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
Positioning The Lap Belt
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortThe folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
the latch plate.
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm .
Seat Belt Pretensioner
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child worn snugly and positioned properly.
if they are wearing a seat belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
2
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that
is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
WARNING! (Continued)
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
Children 12 years old and under should always be
the entire seat belt is extracted.
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
WARNING!
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear- to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
facing child restraint.
locking mode.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bags And Knee Impact Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage Advanced Front Air Bags.
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- Knee Impact Bolsters
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
away from an inflating air bag.
driver and front passenger, and position the front occuWhen the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad- pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large Air Bags.
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
WARNING!
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are
at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
2
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
body structure.
“AIRBAG.”
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
WARNING!
(Continued)
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
Rollover Events
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the
vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the
seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags,
on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a
near rollover event.
If A Deployment Occurs
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
immediately after deployment.
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
the air bag system.
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
or all of the following may occur:
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
structions for cleaning.
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- Enhanced Accident Response System
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air In the event of an impact, if the communication network
bags will not be in place to protect you.
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
WARNING!
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response SysDeployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot tem perform the following functions:
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
and starting the engine.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
Air Bag Warning Light
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re- the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malcircuits and interconnecting wiring associated function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
with air bag system electrical components.
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the
on position, and stays on after you start the vehicle, or
if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.
If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For
additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light refer to the “Instrument Panel” section of
this manual.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
2
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a times, including babies and children.
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- province, requires that small children ride in proper
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosare recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- ecuted for ignoring it.
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
crash investigation.
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is the rear seats rather than in the front.
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
or call 1–866–732–8243.
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafetyfrom newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
index-53.htm
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Children who are at least two years old
or who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
be used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
No
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than
65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two
or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower
anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child
seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Center only may be removed.
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
Tether Strap Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manurestraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
seating position.
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacand that they should not play with them.
turer’s instructions.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints.
An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
WARNING! (Continued)
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back •
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional information on ALR.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
Yes
No
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
Center Only may be removed
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
more room for the child seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
“click.”
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
Tether Strap Mounting
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
A — Tether Strap Hook
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head 1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
B — Tether Anchor
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head 4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
side of the head restraint.
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child Transporting Pets
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
WARNING!
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to a collision.
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SRT ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
SRT Engine Break-In Recommendations: The following
tips will be helpful in obtaining optimum performance
and maximum durability for your new SRT Vehicle.
Despite modern technology and World Class manufacturing methods, the moving parts of the vehicle must still
wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly
during the first 500 miles (805 km) and continues through
the first oil change interval.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
It is recommended for the operator to observe the • Avoid aggressive braking.
following driving behaviors during the new vehicle
• Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.
break-in period:
• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and
0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):
observe local speed limits.
• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
extended period of time.
• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting manually
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more
(paddles or gear shift) at higher rpms when possible.
than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
• Do not perform sustained operation with the accelera• Avoid aggressive braking.
tor pedal at wide open throttle.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h) and
• Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
observe local speed limits.
For the first 1500 mi (2414 km):
100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):
• Do not participate in track events, sport driving
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more
schools, or similar activities during the first 1500 mi
than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower
(2414 km).
gears (1st to 3rd gears).
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Check engine oil with every refueling and add if
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher
through the first oil change interval. Running the engine
with an oil level below the add mark can cause severe
engine damage
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
WARNING! (Continued)
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
not lit during starting, see your authorized
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
system.
dealer.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Defroster
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel
the air directed against the windshield. See your authobelt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Seat Belts
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Floor Mat Safety Information
WARNING! (Continued)
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
(Continued)
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects
can become trapped under the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts should be located and corrected immediately.
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Tires
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .103
▫ Rear Cross Path — If Equipped. . . . . . . . .
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . .
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . .
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of
Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
3
. . .114
. . .120
. . .122
. . .123
. . .123
. . .124
. . .126
. . .128
. . .128
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Manual Front Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
▫ Passenger Seat Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .135
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .138
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . .
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . .138
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
. . . . . .145
. . . . . .146
. . . . . .147
. . . . . .147
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .148
䡵 MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .159
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .160
▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .166
3
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .170
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .171
▫ ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . .
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .173
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . .
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed
Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . .
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
. . . . .184
. . . . .184
. . . . .185
. . . . .185
. . . . .189
. . . . .190
. . . . .190
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .191
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
▫ Changing FCW Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .196
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .197
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .199
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .201
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .204
▫ Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .206 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Console Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
If
equipped,
the
rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
On or Off through the touchscreen.
a 9-1-1 button.
• Push the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the
feature On.
• Push the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature Off.
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if
features.
you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or
3G(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active
vehicle issues.
and you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data)
or 3G(data) network.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
operator:
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
• The vehicle brand.
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
9-1-1 Call
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1
additional help is needed.
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1
operator may be able to open a voice connection with
the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed.
Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection
with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other vehicle
occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the
9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and
GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
WARNING! (Continued)
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Control system immediately.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors • 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network congestion.
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not • Weather.
limited to, the following factors:
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
by the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/data) or
3G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is
required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) The mirrors are equipped with a rotational hinge. The
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight mirrors have one detent (clockwise) towards the rear of
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
the vehicle and three detent’s (counterclockwise) towards
the front of the vehicle.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Folding Mirrors
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select butThe power mirror controls are located on the driver-side tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the
door trim panel.
mirror that you want to adjust.
Power Mirrors
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
Power Mirror Controls
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vanity Mirrors
A vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the
mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically.
Close the mirror cover to turn off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with
your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the
desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun
visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the
visor and pull rearward.
3
Slide-On-Rod Extender
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Automatic Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
3
Manual Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any gear and enters stand-by mode when the Park Brake
is engaged, the vehicle is not in REVERSE, and the
vehicle is stationary.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The
zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and
extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear
bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas. located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
NOTE:
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumrapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de- per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
tection zones.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
alert during these types of zone entries.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Entering From The Side
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Stationary Objects
Overtaking/Passing
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path — If Equipped
Opposing Traffic
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and deUconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Untected object are present on the same side at the same
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informatime, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
tion.
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
be reduced.
Modes Of Operation
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM NOTE:
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
system, the radio volume is reduced.
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts • If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the approthe RCP state always requests the chime.
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opWhen the BSM system is turned off there will be no
eration of the device.
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
systems.
other than an authorized service facility could void
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
authorization to use this equipment.
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and SEATS
used.
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
General Information
vehicle.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
WARNING!
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
Blind Spot Alert Off
(Continued)
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats
The power seat switches are located on the outboard side
of the front seat cushions. The power seat switches are
used to control the position of the seat.
Power Seat Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
raise and lower the position of the support.
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
are also equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support.
Power Lumbar Switch
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated seat button
setting ON.
once to turn the HI
• Press the heated seat button
the LO setting ON.
a second time to turn
• Press the heated seat button
the heating elements OFF.
a third time to turn
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help
keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
once to choose HI. The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seat, near
• Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or
rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired
choose LO.
position. Using body pressure, move forward and rear• Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to ward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
latched.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
3
Manual Front Seatback Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Passenger Seat Easy Entry
On the passenger seat, pull forward on the lever located
on the side of the seatback in order to dump the seatback
and slide the seat forward. You can also temporarily
remove the seat belt from the guide loop on the seat and
allow the seat belt to retract out of the way. This allows
for easier access to the rear seat. To return the seat to a
normal seating position, first return the seatback to its
original recline location and then slide the entire seat
back to the pre-set lock position.
Easy Entry Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Head Restraints
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the RHR.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to
gain additional clearance to the back of your head.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located at the base of the head restraint and
push downward on the head restraint.
Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3 — Seat Belt Loop
To remove the head restraint, remove the seat belt from
the seat belt loop. Raise the head restraint as far as it can
go then push the adjustment button and the release
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes while pushing the adjustment button and release button. Then adjust it to the
appropriate height.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive
Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with
the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the
event of a collision and could result in serious
injury or death.
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. Pull on the loops located on the
upper part of the rear seatback to fold down either or
both seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when
not in use.
Folding Rear Seatback Loop
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Folded Rear Seat
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, the safety catch is
located under the center front edge of the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
3
Hood Safety Catch Location
Hood Release Lever
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push the safety catch to the left.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 inches (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Hood Safety Catch
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, and
interior lights.
3
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for
parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate
the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel light operation.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
this feature.
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features”
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic information.
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
position.
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
provides increased forward lighting at night by automatwill come on in the automatic mode.
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
Automatic Headlights Only)
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on from high beams to low beams until the approaching
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is vehicle is out of view.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
dealer.
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your InstruTo Activate
ment Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights 1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitivat or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
ity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle highbeam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon
ignition off.
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Deactivate
If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
in vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
system.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inHeadlight Time Delay
formation.
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an
The Daytime Running Lights will turn On when the
unlit area.
engine is started and remain On unless the headlamps
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
are turned ON, the parking brake is applied, or the
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
engine is shut Off.
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
3
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Lane Change Assist
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. three times then automatically turn off.
NOTE:
High/Low Beam Switch
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Drivers lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi released.
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to
pass position for more than 20 seconds, the high beams
will shut off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the
lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
3
Overhead Console
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if
equipped).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom
“OFF” position. The interior lights will remain off when
the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, Driver Information Display (DID),
and radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Instrument Panel Dimmer
The multifunction lever operates the windshield
wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in
Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
the ON/RUN or ACC position. The multifunction
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Dome Light Position
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in
any position other than off.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
several wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever
and then resume the intermittent interval previously
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
selected.
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
continue to operate until you release the multifunction turned off, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles
and then turn off.
lever.
Mist Feature
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on further information.
if the headlight switch is placed in the A (AUTO) Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature.
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
NOTE: For vehicle equipped with rain sensor (auto from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
wipes), please note that in addition to the 10 seconds, the the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
headlights can also turn on if the Rain Sensing feature is to activate this feature.
ON, and the front wipers complete a minimum of 5 wipe The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
cycles within 60 seconds.
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
In this case (auto wipes) the headlights will turn off if no
wipes occurs in 240 Seconds.
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
OFF position when not using the system.
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
NOTE: Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward.
To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
lever on the steering column.
desired.
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it can operate for up to
100 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated
steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on
when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control button through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
turn the heating element ON.
once to
• Press the heated steering wheel button
time to turn the heating element OFF.
a second
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
WARNING!
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
3
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over 1 — ON/OFF
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME
(40 km/h).
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — CANCEL
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has
been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A
CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the
speed is set.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “UnderA soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control withspeed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
out erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition U.S. Speed (mph)
To Deactivate
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
the new set speed will be established.
To Vary The Speed Setting
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Increase Speed
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inincrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
crease speed by pushing the SET + button.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de- • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
the new set speed will be established.
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
moderate hills is normal.
EQUIPPED
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
Control.
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.
Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in • Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode is for cruislight to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
ing at a constant preset speed. For additional information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
Mode” in this section.
sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE: The normal (fixed speed) cruise control will not
react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
selected.
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
Always confirm which mode is selected.
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
WARNING!
the vehicle ahead.
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
appropriate distance between vehicles.
NOTE:
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure
safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when
driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered,
slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
The system will cancel when the vehicle speed drops
below 15 mph (24 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
— NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
— SET+/ACCEL
— RESUME
— SET-/DECEL
— DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
— ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
— DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
— CANCEL
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the DID displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
3
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the ESC is in Full-off mode.
To Activate/Deactivate
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays time, the system will turn off and the DID will display
“ACC Ready.”
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID
will display the set speed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
(Continued)
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the DID.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
• The system will not be controlling the distance be- • A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
speed will only be determined by the position of the
To Turn Off
accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANCEL button is pressed.
• The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h).
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pushed.
• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the To Resume
Drive position.
If there is a set speed in memory press the RES (resume)
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The DID will display the last set speed.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
pressing the SET + button.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is rebutton is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
flected in the DID.
in the DID.
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
pressing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Under- • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
button is released. The decrease in set speed is respeed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
flected in the DID.
U.S. Speed (mph)
NOTE:
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph • When you override and push the SET + button or SET
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
- buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
of the vehicle.
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the DID.
• The ACC system applies the brake down to 15 mph
(24 km/h) when following a target vehicle.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
3
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To decrease the distance setting, press the Distance
Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the
button is pressed, the distance setting decreases by one
bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
To increase the distance setting, press the Distance Setspeed.
ting — Increase button and release. Each time the button
is pressed, the distance setting increases by one bar • The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
(longer).
• The distance setting is changed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the DID and a chime will sound
Brake Alert
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
NOTE:
The
“Brake!”
Screen
in the DID is a warning for
capacity.
the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean
that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtake Aid
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when
passing on the left hand side.
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The instrument cluster.
DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The
information it displays depends on ACC system status. The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of • System Cancel
the following displays in the DID:
• Driver Override
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• System Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap• ACC Proximity Warning
tive Cruise Control Off.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
• ACC Unavailable Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
• The DID will return to the last display selected after
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
five seconds of no ACC display activity
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
Display Warnings And Maintenance
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
this warning may temporarily occur.
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as section.
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display “ACC/ examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
system will deactivate.
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- NOTE:
tant to note the following maintenance items:
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
the sensor lens.
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
your authorized dealer.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and • Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an afterrequire a sensor realignment.
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, Service ACC/FCW Warning
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
If the system turns off, and the DID displays “ACC/FCW
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailmalfunction.
able Service Required”, there may be an internal system
When the condition that deactivated the system is no fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC funclonger present, the system will return to the “Adaptive tionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
simply reactivating it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
3
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume Using ACC On Hills
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
system functionality.
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
ACC Hill Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
3
Lane Changing Example
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Narrow Vehicles
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
General Information
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency Mode
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op- To change between the different control modes, push the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
eration of the device.
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
other than an authorized service facility could void
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONauthorization to use this equipment.
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode.
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed
Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the
SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “UnderTurn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Set A Desired Speed
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
U.S. Speed (mph)
To Decrease Speed
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Undercontinue to increase in 5 mph increments until the standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
in the DID display.
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
Metric Speed (km/h)
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is rebutton is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID display.
flected in the DID display.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the • The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
Drive position.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will To Resume Speed
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re- To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
flected in the DID display.
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed To Turn Off
Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory:
memory if:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Metric Speed (km/h)
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- • The ignition is turned off.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
pushed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) — IF
EQUIPPED
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides
the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings
(within the DID), to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings are intended to
provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
FCW Message
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
When the system determines that a forward collision is
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
message will be deactivated.
visual warnings.
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph
(10 km/h).
WARNING! (Continued)
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
vehicle in front of you.
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the The forward collision button is located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
surroundings.
WARNING!
To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision
button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on).
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward
collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns
off).
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
in front of you.
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it
NOTE:
will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
The FCW Sensitivity Settings are programmable through
the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in • FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inoverhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
formation.
path of the car, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting in the “On”
higher rate of speed.
setting, this allows the system to warn you of a possible
Changing FCW Status
collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are • FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
farther away. This gives you the most reaction time to
screens.
avoid a possible collision.
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the DID displays:
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
ParkSense Sensors
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System
Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of this
system and recommendations.
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79
inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect System.
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
Instrument Panel” for further information.
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast, to
ParkSense Display
continuous.
ParkSense Warning Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
3
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arc — Left
Rear
Arc — Center
Rear
Arc — Right
Rear
Radio Volume
Reduced
Greater
than 79 in
(200 cm)
None
None
WARNING ALERTS
79-59 in
59-47 in
47-39 in
(200-150 cm)
(150-120
(120-100
cm)
cm)
Slow
Slow
Single 1/2- Second
(for rear
(for rear
Tone
(for rear center
center
center
only)
only)
only)
None
None
None
39-25 in
(100-65
cm)
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
None
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
None
None
None
None
3rd
Flashing
None
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
25-12 in
(65-30
cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
Continuous
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
Yes
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense system is disabled, the
Drivers Information Display (DID) will display
the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Drivers Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is
moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the DID
will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
disabled or defective. The ParkSense switch LED will be
OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch
is pushed and the system is disabled or requires service,
the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily and
then the LED will be ON.
ParkSense Switch
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” appears in the Driver Information Display (DID),
make sure the outer surface and the inside of the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE
WIPE
REAR
SENSORS”
or
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message for five seconds. Refer to “Driver Information appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer.
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Panel” for further information.
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
system has detected a faulted condition, the Driver
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damInformation Display (DID) will display the
age the sensors.
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under
this condition, ParkSense will not operate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio when it
is sounding an audio tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
affect the performance of ParkSense or render the
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
system temporarily unavailable.
bumper.
• When you turn ParkSense off in DRIVE, the instrument cluster will display ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙ for five • Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
seconds. Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle
12 inches 30 (cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure
to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a
the ignition.
close object as a sensor problem, causing the
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
position and ParkSense is turned off, the Driver Informessage to be displayed in the Driver Information
mation Display (DID) will display “PARKSENSE OFF”
Display (DID).
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear license plate. The image will be displayed
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to When the Vehicle is shifted out of Reverse (with camera
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. delay turned OFF) the rear camera mode is exited and the
last touchscreen appears again.
After five seconds this note will disappear.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position. The active guide lines will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
feature and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted the vehicle.
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
⬙PARK⬙ or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF
position.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable
to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
3
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and sunglass storage. Universal Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink) button and a power sunroof switch may also
be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console
Courtesy/Reading Lights
At the forward end of the overhead console are two
courtesy/reading lights.
Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time
to turn off the light.
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward past the second detent.
The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead
console designate the three different HomeLink channels.
The HomeLink indicator is located on the left side of the
first button.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.
Push on the raised bar to close.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicle’s battery.
HomeLink Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
NOTE:
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
call toll-free 800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink For programming garage door openers that were manubuttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
indicator flashes.
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 1.
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
2.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
3.
activates, programming is complete.
Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the before 1995.
channels.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to (Non-Rolling Code)
program while you push and hold the hand-held To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
transmitter button.
follow these steps:
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Rerelease the button.
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button,
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indiseveral seconds of transmission.
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigfully trained.
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink 4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
door may open and close while you are programming.
time-out in the same manner.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programrelease the button.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
follow all remaining steps.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
NOTE:
erase the channels.
Using HomeLink
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
programming, plug it back in at this time.
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, any time.
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
Security
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
in your vehicle.
toll-free 800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
for information or assistance.
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
WARNING!
erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
(Continued)
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 800-355-3515 or,
on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
General Information
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
two conditions:
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
WARNING! (Continued)
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
(Continued)
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close.” During Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatithe sunroof.
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open.” During Express Open operation, any movement
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
Opening Sunroof — Express
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Pinch Protect Feature
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
held rearward again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obClosing Sunroof — Express
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucsecond and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Wind Buffeting
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
Venting Sunroof — Express
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurand the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of
the front windows closed, open the front windows tosunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
gether to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
Sunshade Operation
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Sunroof Maintenance
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is the glass panel.
open.
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the
outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
the battery and powered at all times.
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door These power outlets can also operate a conventional cigar
will cancel this feature.
lighter unit.
Ignition Off Operation
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the NOTE:
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
• The front integrated center stack power outlet can be
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instruchanged from switched “ignition” to constant “batment Panel” for further information.
tery” powered all the time by moving the integrated
center stack fuse #12 in the Rear Power Distribution
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Center from fuse location “IGN” to “B+.” Refer to
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
“Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)” in “Mainoutlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
taining Your Vehicle.”
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a • To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR cigar knob and
element must be used.
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” can be powered when The front power outlet is located next to the storage area
on the integrated center stack of the instrument panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
3
Power Outlet — Integrated Center Stack Front
Power Outlet — Center Console
NOTE: All accessories connected to these powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is
not in use to protect the battery against discharge.
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Integrated Center Stack
2 — #38 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
(Continued)
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Front Cupholders
The front cupholders are located in the center console
and in the door panels.
Door Cupholder
Front Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Rear Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.
3
Rear Cupholders
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel.
Opened Glove Compartment
Glove Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
Console Storage
The center console has a storage compartment located
underneath the armrest. The compartment contains a 12
Volt power outlet, and a molded-in coin holder (designed
to hold various size coins). The center console may also
be equipped with a Universal Consumer Interface (UCI).
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and iPhone
devices. Refer to “Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) —
If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
3
Center Console
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment
lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button
to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) – If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT . . . . . . . . . . .224
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . .226
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ White Telltale Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .253
▫ Cruise Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Customer Programmable
Features — Uconnect 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . .270
4
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Guidelines For Race Track Use Of Your SRT . . .286
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . .322
▫ SRT Performance Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ SRT Drive Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ Race Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ Valet Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .331
▫ ECO Mode — If Equipped With Automatic
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .319
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
䡵 iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .319
▫ Introducing Uconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
▫ Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . .322
▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
▫ Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . .351
▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . .345
▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
4
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
— Air Outlets
— Instrument Cluster
— Glove Box
— Media Center
5 — Keyless Start/Stop Button
6 — Trunk Release Button
7 — Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT
4
Instrument Cluster For SRT 6.4L
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Tachometer
4. Fuel Gauge
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
(RPM x 1000).
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position. The fuel pump symbol points to
2. Driver Information Display (DID) Display
the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Driver Information Display (DID) mes- 5. Temperature Gauge
sages. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)”
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indiin “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for furcates that the engine cooling system is operating
ther information.
satisfactorily.
3. Speedometer
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem• Indicates vehicle speed.
perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT
Instrument Cluster For SRT 6.2L Supercharged
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
1. Tachometer
4. Fuel Gauge
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
(RPM x 1000).
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position. The fuel pump symbol points to
2. Driver Information Display (DID) Display
the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Driver Information Display (DID) mes- 5. Temperature Gauge
sages. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)”
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indiin “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for furcates that the engine cooling system is operating
ther information.
satisfactorily.
3. Speedometer
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem• Indicates vehicle speed.
perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
4
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator light switches on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
4
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected,
it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied,
that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is
at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the AntiLock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light
will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
4
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
4
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and
the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after
reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, a
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes duration is
expired, whichever come first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system
is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
Charging System Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Charging System Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. This light illuminates when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or
comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s nonessential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”
4
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn
off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
4
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop them vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
4
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trunk Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and not fully closed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
4
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused
the ESC activation.
4
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
In any situation in which the message on the display is ⬙See manual⬙, it is ESSENTIAL to
refer to the contents of the ⬙Wheels⬙ paragraph in the ⬙Technical data⬙ chapter, strictly complying with the indications that you find there.
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
4
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
those tires.
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
low tire pressure telltale.
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to approximately one minute and then remain continuously
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsereduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
4
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
Adaptive Cruise Control Alert Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control Alert Indicator Light
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. For further information,
refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
4
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Forward Collision Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Forward Collision Indicator Light
This telltale will turn on warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light
This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
4
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
Electronic Speed Control Set Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control Set Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control has been set.
Blue Telltale Indicator Light
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam.
4
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
White Telltale Indicator Light
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel. The
The Driver Information Display (DID) features an inter- DID Menu Items consists of the following:
active display which is located in the instrument cluster. • Speedometer
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
• Vehicle Info
• Performance — If Equipped
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
Driver Information Display (DID) Display
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pushing the arrow
• Diagnostics — If Equipped
4
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by UP And DOWN Arrow Buttons:
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Using the UP or DOWN arrows allows you to
wheel:
cycle through the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title
area.
LEFT And RIGHT Arrow Buttons:
Using the LEFT or RIGHT arrow buttons
allows you to cycle through the submenu items
of the Main menu item.
NOTE:
DID Controls
• Holding the UP/DOWN or LEFT/RIGHT
arrow buttons will loop the user through the
currently selected menu or options presented on the screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
• Main menu and submenu’s wrap for continuous • Pushing the LEFT arrow button will exit each subscrolling.
menu layer and return to the main menu.
• Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and new Perforscreen viewed within that main menu will be dis- mance Timers):
played.
• Information is reset by pushing and holding the OK
OK Button:
button.
For Digital Speedometer:
Engine Oil Life Reset
• Pushing the OK button changes units (MPH or km/h). Oil Change Required
For Screen Setup and Vehicle Settings:
• OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus.
• Within each submenu layer, the UP/DOWN arrows
will allow the user to select the item of interest.
• Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a
confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to
the 1st page of the submenu).
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
4
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method Of Navigating To The Oil Life
Screen In The DID And Holding OK
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
within 10 seconds.
driving style.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
Use the steering wheel DID controls for the following
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the procedure(s):
OFF/LOCK position.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
2. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) – If Equipped
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.” The Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) is enabled on
3. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to access vehicles with manual transmission, or when a vehicle
with automatic transmission is in manual shift mode. The
the ”Oil Life” screen.
PSI provides the driver with a visual indication within
4. Push and hold the OK button to rest oil life. If the DID display when the driver configured gear shift
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display point has been reached and the driver is still accelerating.
will update to show 100%. If conditions are not met a This indication notifies the driver to change gear correpopup message of ⬙To reset oil life engine must be off sponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit. When
with ignition in run⬙ will be displayed (for 5 seconds), the shift up indicator is shown on the display, the PSI is
and the user will remain at the Oil Life screen.
advising the driver to engage a higher gear.
5. Push and release the DOWN or UP arrow button to The PSI indicator in the DID display remains illuminated
exit the submenu screen.
until the driver changes gear, or the driving conditions
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you return to a situation where changing gear is not required,
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not corresponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit.
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
4
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding DID Selectable Menu Items
Your Instrument Panel” for further information on en- Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
abling, disabling, and configuring the Performance Shift the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the DID.
Indicator.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
Cruise Control
Speedometer
This area will show reconfigurable white caution tellPush and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
tales. These telltales include:
the Speedometer menu is displayed in the DID. Push and
• Cruise Ready
release the OK button to toggle units (km/h or mph) of
This telltale will illuminate white to indicate the digital speedometer
that the Adaptive Cruise Control system is
Vehicle Info
activated.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
• Electronic Speed Control SET
the Vehicle Info menu is highlighted in the DID. Push and
This telltale will illuminate green when the elec- release the RIGHT arrow buttons to enter the submenu
tronic speed control is SET. Refer to “Electronic items of Vehicle Info. Follow the directional prompts to
Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features access or reset any of the following Vehicle Info submenu
items:
Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
Tire Pressure Monitor
Coolant Temp
Trans Temp
Oil Temp
Oil Pressure
Oil Life
Battery Voltage
Intake Air Temp — If Equipped
Engine Torque — If Equipped
Engine Power — If Equipped
Air-Fuel Ratio — 6.2L Supercharged
Boost Pressure — 6.2L Supercharged
Intercooler Water Temp — 6.2L Supercharged
Performance Features — If Equipped
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Features is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “ Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for Main Menu/SubMenu selectable items and navigation.
4
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Performance Features include the following:
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• 0-100 mph (0-161 km/h) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• 1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• 1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• Braking Distance
– Distance
– From Speed
• Current G-Forces
• Peak G-Forces
• Lap Timer
• Lap History
– Will list the last 5 lap with the best lap highlighted
in green.
• Top Speed
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
The following describes each feature and its operation:
0 to 100 mph (0 to 161 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 100 mph (0 to 161 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
within 20 seconds.
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within
10 seconds.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at
0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at
conditions are met for the event to begin.
0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when
conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 0 to
100 mph (0 to 161 km/h) in less then 20 seconds.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph
(100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.
• To clear the vehicle’s best, last and current 0 to
100 mph (0 to 161 km/h) time, push and hold the OK
• To clear the vehicle’s best, last, and current 0-60 mph
button for two seconds.
(0-100 km/h) time, push and hold the OK button for
two seconds.
1/8 Mile (200 Meters)
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
vehicle to travel 1/8 mile within 15 seconds and the
vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/8 mile.
4
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph • To clear the vehicle’s best 1/4 mile (400 meters) run,
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condipush and hold the OK button for two seconds.
tions are met for the event to begin.
Braking Distance
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8 When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
mile (200 meters) in less then 15 seconds.
distance, and the speed at which the brake pedal was
• To clear the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile (200 meters) run, pushed.
push and hold the OK button for five seconds.
• This feature will only function when applying the
1/4 Mile (400 Meters)
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the • Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
vehicle to travel 1/4 mile within 25 seconds and the
• The word “READY” will display when conditions are
vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/4 mile (400 meters).
met for the event to begin.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph
• The distance and speed measurements display while
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condithe event is taking place.
tions are met for the event to begin.
• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/4
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a commile (400 meters) in less then 25 seconds.
plete stop.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
• Pushing and holding the OK button will clear the Lap Timer
current and last run values.
When selected, the Lap Timer page will show the timer
always at 0:00.00 with the previous Best and Last time
Current G-Force
data (unless the driver has cleared it via hold to Reset).
When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force
(lateral and longitudinal) that displays the directions of • Pushing OK will start “current” timer from 0:00.0.
the forces.
• When OK is pushed, the times are updated accordPeak G-Force
ingly.
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force • As soon as the driver exits the Lap Timer pages, the
values (two lateral and two longitudinal).
“current” timer will stop and the time will be reset to
0:00.00.
• When a force greater than zero is measured, the
display will update the value as it climbs. As the • If the driver stays on the Lap Timer pages, the “curG-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
rent” timer will reset to 0:00.0 when ignition is placed
in the off position, or ignition placed in the ON
• Push and hold the OK button to clear the peak force
position (or will roll over at 59:59.99 if ever possible).
values.
4
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Each time the driver pushes OK for a Lap that current • Lap History page is a static display of lap times only.
time populates, the Last time and also populates the
Top Speed
1st (top) space on the Timer History page the current
time resets to 0:00.0 at every push of the OK button. When selected, this screen displays the Top Speed since
last reset:
• The timer will stop when the driver navigates away
• Populates a top speed from first drive cycle and every
from this page.
time that speed is exceeded that number is stored here
Lap History
unless/until the driver resets the screen.
When selected, this screen displays the Lap History, and
• Latching over ignition cycles.
will color highlight the time that is the best time from the
Timer Page.
• Units will change with the global change in units.
• Each time the driver pushes the OK button (while on Driver Assist — If Equipped
the Lap Timer page) the current Lap Time populates Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
the 1st spot and the rest of the data shifts down.
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
• Color will indicate the time that is the best time from information displayed depends on ACC system status.
the Timer Page.
• Holding the OK button only resets the page you are on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
the following displays in the DID:
• Distance Setting Change
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• System Cancel
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap• Driver Override
tive Cruise Control Off.”
• System Off
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
• ACC Proximity Warning
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise • ACC Unavailable Warning
Control Ready.”
• The DID will return to the last display selected after
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise ConACC SET
trol (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
4
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Fuel Economy
Trip Info
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the DID. the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the DID (Toggle left
or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information
• Two sub menu pages one with Current value diswill display the following:
played and one without the Current Value displayed:
– Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l) • Distance
– Range To Empty (miles or km)
• Average Fuel Economy
– Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Elapsed Time
– The Max and Min values will correspond to the
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
particular engine requirements
• Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber Audio
color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
• Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information. the Audio Menu displays in the DID.
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Messages Menu item is highlighted in the DID. This
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
feature shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see
what the stored messages are.
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push and
release the OK button to enter the submenus. The Screen
Setup feature allows you to change what information is
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location
that information is displayed.
1. Upper Left
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty (default)
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
2. Upper Right
• Compass
• Outside Temp (default)
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
3. Center
• Menu Title (default)
• Compass
4
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Audio Inform
• Digital Speed
• None
4. Current Gear
• On
• Off (default)
5. Odometer
• Show (default)
• Hide
6. Fuel Gauge
• Standard (default)
• Detailed
7. Defaults
• Ok
• Cancel
Diagnostics — If Equipped
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the diagnostic Menu is selected. Then, the Driver is able
to view engine and emission vehicle faults.
• Push OK to have the most recent fault code sent.
• There is a delay when the next diagnostic code is
requested during which the following message is
displayed:
• “Checking System for Diagnostic Codes.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
• Driver must push the OK button again to see the next
Pcode otherwise current message remains displayed.
• Driver exits when they cycle to another submenu (up
or down).
• Faults are displayed from newest to the oldest.
4
• If the menu is exited before the end of codes is reached
- when the driver re-enters the list will be restarted
from the beginning.
• When no codes are present or the last code is reached
= (P0000) and this message is displayed:
• “No Further or End of Diagnostic Codes.”
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allows you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On Touchscreen And
Buttons On Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
8.4 Settings
Press the “Apps
” button, then press the “Settings”
button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting
screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you
to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety
& Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
Your Uconnect system may also have a Screen Off and Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/
Back buttons on the faceplate.
Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the Personal Data and System Information.
Uconnect screen. Push the Screen Off button on the NOTE:
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
Push the Back button on the faceplate to exit out of a
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
may vary.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option”
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the “X”
button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with
the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
⬙parade⬙ positions.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
the following settings will be available:
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
• Display Mode
Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and
When in this display you may select one of the auto the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
display settings. To change Mode status, press and re- ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display
lease the “Manual” or “Auto” button on the touchscreen.
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Set Theme
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may select the theme for the
display screen. Changing the theme will modify the
background image, highlight color, and button highlight
of the display screen.
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the sound
heard when a touchscreen button (button on the touchscreen) is pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on
the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language
button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has
been selected.
• Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will
stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.
With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open
until it is manually closed. Press the Control Screen
Time-Out button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
• Distance
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the Driver Information Display (DID) as
the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your selection, press the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
Units
• Fuel Consumption
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
“km/L.”
• Pressure
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
• Temperature
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation • Power
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
Select from: “HP” (US), “HP” (UK), and “kW.”
measure are listed below:
• Torque
• Speed
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
Select from: “lb-ft” or “Nm.”
4
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice
Clock
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length
• Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
This feature will allow you to automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press
the “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
• Show Command List
• Set Time Hours
When in this display, you may change the Show Command
List settings. To change the Show Command List settings,
press the “Always,” “With Help” or “Never” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or down.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
• Set Time Minutes
Safety & Driving Assistance
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down.
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on
the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Time Format
This feature will allow you to select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs
or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW status, press and release the “Near” or “Far”
button. For further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle”.
4
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Paddle Shifters — If Equipped
• Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the paddle shifters can be The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be seenabled or disabled. Select the “Enable” or “Disable” lected from the DID or Uconnect System. The chime
volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The
button on the touchscreen.
factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make
• ParkSense — If Equipped
your selection, press the “Rear ParkSense Vol.” button on
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate through ignition cycles.
the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the
ParkSense status, press and release the “Sound Only” or When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
“Sound and Display” button. Refer to “ParkSense” in Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for sys- in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
tem function and operating information.
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. To make your selection,
press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected.
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the
4
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Controls” button on the touchscreen, the “settings”
button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving
Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the
“Parkview Backup Camera Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or OFF.
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected.
Lights
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
When this feature is selected and the wipers are on, the
system will automatically activate the windshield wipers
if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your
selection, press the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
• Headlight Off Delay
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, press
When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the
amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine
is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting,
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec,
60 sec or 90 seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval.
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has
been selected. Refer to “Lights — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
4
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Flash Lights With Lock
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that the setting has been
When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash
selected.
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the passive • Flash Lights With Lock
entry feature. This feature may be selected with or without When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” button on the Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the passive
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, entry feature. This feature may be selected with or without
indicating that the setting has been selected.
the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your
selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchindicating that the setting has been selected.
screen the following settings will be available:
• Sound Horn With Lock
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press” button
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit”
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Doors & Locks
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use
RKE transmitter).
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. • Passive Entry — If Equipped
When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
(RKE) transmitter LOCK or UNLOCK buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Refer Engine Off Options
to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
Starting Your Vehicle”.
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
• Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seat” button
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when • Engine Off Power Delay
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperaWhen this feature is selected, the power window
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped),
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto-On
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
Vehicle Start” button to select from “Off,” “Remote Start”
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
or “All Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting,
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
showing that setting has been selected.
Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the “+” or “-”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
button on the touchscreen to select your desired time • Equalizer
interval, and choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
minutes” or “10 minutes.”
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting
• Headlight Off Delay
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
touchscreen.
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touch- finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
screen to select your desired time interval.
directly on the desired setting.
Audio
• Speed Adjusted Volume
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
following settings will be available.
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
• Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade • Surround Sound — If Equipped
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
• Paired Audio Sources
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
for portable devices connected through the AUX input. Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
• Loudness — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchLoudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To screen, the following settings will be available:
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the • Channel Skip
touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.”
SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To make
Phone/Bluetooth
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Subscription Information
• Paired Phones
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
This feature shows which phones are paired to the limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
services, it will be necessary to access the information on default setting, press the Restore Settings button. A
pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
reset your settings to default?” select “Yes” to restore, or
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
“Cancel” to exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop up
to access the Subscription Information screen.
appears stating ⬙settings reset to default.⬙
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
Clear Personal Data
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
the screen or visit the provider online.
on the touchscreen the following settings will be availNOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription able:
and is available for U.S. residents only.
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
• Restore Settings
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to
Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared,
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to
a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal data cleared”.
their default settings. To restore the settings to their
Restore Settings
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Due to the extreme conditions encountered durAfter pressing the “System Information” button on the ing track use, any damage or wear associated with track
touchscreen the following information will be available: use is not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.
If your SRT vehicle is equipped with Drive Modes, they
• System Information
will alter the vehicle’s performance in various driving
When System Information is selected, a System Informa- situations. It is recommended that your vehicle operates
tion screen will appear displaying the system software in SPORT or TRACK modes during the track event.
version.
Prior to each track event/day:
Guidelines For Race Track Use Of Your SRT
• Verify all fluids are at the correct levels. Refer to
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid levels & specifiWARNING!
cations.
Always drive carefully within your capabilities.
• Verify the front and rear brake pads have more than ½
Never drive in a reckless or dangerous manner,
the original pad thickness remaining. If the brake pads
which can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
require changing, please burnish prior to track outing
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
at full pace. Refer to “Track Burnishing Your Brakes.”
prevent accidents.
System Information
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
Track usage results in increased operating temperatures
of the engine, transmission, clutch, driveline and brake
system. This increased operating temperature may affect
Noise Vibration Harshness (NVH) countermeasures designed into your vehicle. New components may need to
It is recommended that each track outing end with a
be installed to return the system to the original NVH
minimum of one cool down lap using minimal braking.
performance.
Change the differential and manual transmission fluid
Recommended tire pressure for track use:
after every five hours of track use. Refer to “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for fluid levels & specifications.
• Challenger/Charger: 40 psi hot, 32 psi front, 30 psi rear
cold
If equipped with a removable lower front fascia grille, it
At the conclusion of each track event, it is recommended
that a brake bleed procedure be performed to maintain
the pedal feel and stopping capability of your Brembo
High Performance brake system.
is recommended to remove it for track use during Track Burnishing Your Brakes
warm/hot weather to improve cooling airflow to critical
To avoid “green lining fade” during track use, the brake
powertrain and cooling system components.
pads and rotors must have a thermal burnish for factory
All SRT vehicles are track tested for 24 hours of endur- installed components or when new brake friction comance, however, it is recommended that the suspension ponents are installed:
system, brake system, prop shaft, and half shaft boots
should be inspected for wear or damage after every track
event.
4
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Utilize one track session to burnish brakes by driving 5. There should be a thin, ashy layer when inspecting the
at 75% speed. Brake at approximately 0.60 – 0.80g Max
pads installed in the caliper. If the ash layer is more
than ½ the thickness of the brake pad material, this is
without ABS intervention.
an indication of too aggressive of a burnish.
2. Lap the track in this manner until you start smelling
the brakes. Continue for another ½ lap at speed, then 6. Sometimes, a second burnish session is required. If the
brake pads start smelling in the next track session,
do a two lap cool down with minimal brake applicareduce speed and braking deceleration to burnish
tion. Make sure the brakes are not smoking. If they are,
do another cool down lap.
targets and follow steps 2 through 4.
3. Do not continue for more than one full burnishing lap 7. New brake pads installed on old rotors still need to be
burnished. New rotors installed with old pads should
after you start smelling the brakes. Do not get them
smoking heavily. This will get them too hot and will
be burnished at the track, or street driven for 300 city
miles, to develop an adequate lining transfer layer on
negatively affect their life in future track use.
the rotor surface prior to track use.
4. Allow the vehicle to sit and cool in the paddock for at
least 30 minutes. If an infrared thermal gun is avail- 8. Rotors that pulsate during track use should be replaced. Resurfacing of the rotors is not recommended,
able, allow the rotors to cool to 200° F (93.3° C) before
as it removes mass from the rotor, reducing its thermal
going back out.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
capacity. Resurfacing also thins the rotor cheek, making it less robust and increasing the likelihood of
pulsation in further track use.
SRT Performance Pages
Performance Pages is an application that provides a
display for performance indicators, as received from the
Instrument Cluster, that will help you gain familiarity
with the capabilities of your SRT vehicle in real-time.
To access the SRT Performance Pages, press the “Apps”
button on the touchscreen, then press the “SRT Performance” button on the touchscreen, or press “SRT Pages”
in the top left of the touchscreen while in Drive Modes.
Press the desired button on the touchscreen to access that
specific Performance Page.
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the SRT Performance Pages is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the Performance Pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
4
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Performance Pages include the following:
The following describes each feature and its operation:
• Home
Home
• Timers
• Gauges 1
• Gauges 2
• G-Force
• Engine
SRT Performance Pages — Home
When Home is selected, the following features will be
available:
• A series of six images which can be selected by the user.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
• A left and right arrow to allow the user to scroll When the Timers Page is selected you will be able to
through vehicle images.
select from following “Tickets”:
• A short-cut to the SRT Drive Modes feature.
• Current
Timers
Pressing the “Current” button displays a “real time”
summary of the performance timers.
• Last
Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run
of performance timers.
• Best
Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run
of performance timers, except for braking data.
SRT Performance Pages — Timers
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Save
• With a USB jump drive installed, press the “USB”
button to save runs to the jump drive.
Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the last run.
Any saved run over 10, will overwrite the last saved run • With an SD Card installed, press the “SD Card” to save
for Uconnect System storage. The operation of the Save
runs to the SD Card.
feature is listed below:
• Press the “Uconnect” button to save the runs to the
Owner web page.
• Press the “Cancel” button to view the last timer
“Ticket.”
The “Tickets” contain the timers listed below:
• Reaction Time
Measures the driver’s reaction time for launching the
vehicle against a simulated drag strip timing light (behavior modeled after 500 Sportsman Tree) displayed in
the Driver Information Display (DID).
SRT Performance Pages — “Save”
NOTE: The Reaction Time, MPH, ⅛, and ¼ Mile timers
will be “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH (0 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)
• Brake Distance
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full
60 mph (0 to 100 km/h).
stop. Contains current and last data for distance and start
– from speed.
• 0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h)
NOTE: The distance measurement will be aborted if the
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a
100 mph (0 to 160 km/h).
complete stop.
• ⅛ Mile (200 meter)
• Brake Speed
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ⅛ mile
Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the
(200 meters).
brake pedal is depressed.
• ¼ Mile (400 meter)
NOTE: Brake Distance and Speed timers will only disDisplays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ¼ mile play ⬙ready⬙ when vehicle is traveling at greater than 30
(400 meters).
MPH (48 km/h).
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Gauges 1
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 1 (6.2L Manual
Transmission)
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 1 (6.2L Automatic
Transmission)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
4
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
• Battery Voltage
Shows the actual battery voltage.
• Trans Oil Temp (Auto Transmission Only)
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 1 (6.4L)
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
Shows the actual automatic transmission oil temperature. • Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
Gauges 2
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (6.4L Automatic
Transmission)
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Battery Voltage
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (6.4L Manual
Transmission)
Shows the actual battery voltage.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
• Intake Air Temperature
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
Shows the actual intake air temperature.
• Boost Pressure
• Transmission Temperature (Automatic Transmission
Only)
Shows the current value for boost pressure.
Shows the actual transmission temperature.
Shows the current value for the air fuel ratio.
• Air Fuel Ratio
• Inter-Cooler (I/C) Coolant Temperature
Shows the current value for the I/C coolant temperature.
• Intake Air Temperature
Shows the actual intake air temperature.
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (6.2L)
4
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
G-Force
When G-Force is selected, the following features will be
available:
• Lateral G-Force Left and Right
The lateral g-force measures the (sideways) left and right
force of the vehicle.
• Longitudinal G-Force Fore and Aft
The longitudinal g-force measures the acceleration and
braking force of the vehicle.
• Peak G-Forces Fore Aft, Left and Right
This shows the maximum g-forces that have been
achieved since the last reset from the DID. Peak values
SRT Performance Pages — G-Force
are maintained through ignition cycles by the DID until
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
they are cleared by the driver.
values (two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as
steering angle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
• Vehicle Speed
Engine
Vehicle Speed measures the current speed of the vehicle
in either mph or km/h, starting at 0 with no maximum
value.
• Steering Wheel Angle
4
Steering Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to
measure the degree of the steering wheel relative to zero.
The zero degree measurement indicates a steering wheel
straight ahead position. When the steering angle value is
negative, this indicates a turn to the left, and when the
steering angle value is positive, a turn to the right.
When a force greater than zero is measured, the display
will update the value as it climbs. As the G-Force falls,
the peak forces will continue to display.
SRT Performance Pages — Engine (6.4L Automatic
Transmission)
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Instantaneous Horsepower/Kilowatts
Shows the instantaneous horsepower.
• Instantaneous Torque
Shows the instantaneous torque.
• Oil Pressure (6.4L Only)
Shows the actual oil pressure.
• Gear (Automatic Transmission Only)
SRT Performance Pages — Engine (6.2L Automatic
Transmission)
Shows the current (or pending) operating gear of the
vehicle.
• Boost Pressure (6.2L Only)
When selected, this screen displays the following values: Shows the actual boost pressure.
• Vehicle Speed
Shows the actual vehicle speed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
SRT Drive Modes
Key FOB 6.2L Supercharged Engine — If Equipped
RED key FOB unlocks the full potential of the engine’s
output, and allows the driver to select from two power
levels within Drive Modes Set-Up.
4
Red Key FOB
Black Key FOB
If your vehicle is equipped with the 6.2L supercharged
Use of the BLACK key FOB limits the driver to a reduced
engine, it will support an additional engine power level
engine output. This information is also available within
configuration as part of SRT Drive Modes. Use of the
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the SRT Drive Modes interface, and can be accessed by Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a Drive Modes feature
pressing the “KEY FOB” button on the touchscreen in the which allows for coordinating the operation of various
SRT Drive Modes menu.
vehicle systems depending upon the type of driving
behavior desired. The Drive Modes feature is controlled
Drive Modes
through the Uconnect radio and may be accessed by
performing any of the following:
• Pushing the SRT button on the instrument panel
switch bank.
• Selecting “Drive Modes” from the “Apps” menu.
• Selecting “Drive Modes” from within the Performance
Pages menu.
NOTE: Not all options listed in this manual are available
on every vehicle. Refer to the chart below for all available
Drive Mode vehicle configurations.
Drive Modes
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
Engine/
Transmission
6.2L Auto
6.2L Manual
6.4L Auto
6.4L Manual
Red Key/
700+ HP
X
X
N/A
N/A
Black
Key/500
HP
X
X
N/A
N/A
Transmission
Paddle
Shifters
Suspension
Steering
Traction
X
N/A
X
N/A
X
N/A
X
N/A
X
X
X
X
N/A
N/A
X
X
X
X
X
X
The SRT Drive Modes main screen displays the current
drive mode and real-time status of the vehicle’s performance configuration. The selectable Drive Modes buttons
are Track, Sport, Custom, or Default and will be highlighted when displaying the current configuration. Information shown below each drive mode button will indicate the actual status of each system, along with a graphic
that displays the status of the vehicle’s components. The
color red indicates “Track,” orange “Sport,” and yellow
“Street.” If the system status shown does not match the
current drive mode set up, a message will be displayed
indicating which values are not matching the current
mode and why.
NOTE: ESC Full-Off can be activated across all of the
Drive Mode features by pushing and holding the ESC Off
button on the instrument panel switch bank for five
seconds.
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Listed below are the available Drive Modes:
Track Mode
Sport Mode
Drive Modes (Sport)
Drive Modes (Track)
Pressing the “Track” button on the touchscreen will
activate the configuration for typical track driving. The
Transmission, Traction, Steering, and Suspension systems
are all set to their “Track” settings highlighted in red. The
Paddle Shifters are enabled.
Pressing the “Sport” button on the touchscreen will
activate the configuration for typical enthusiast driving.
The Traction, Transmission, Steering, and Suspension
systems are all set to their “Sport” settings highlighted in
orange. The Paddle Shifters are enabled.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
Suspension can be configured in either the “Street,”
“Sport,” or “Track” modes and the Paddle Shifters may
be enabled or disabled while in this mode.
Default Mode
Custom Mode
4
Drive Modes (Default)
The vehicle will start in Default Mode unless Valet or
ECO mode (if equipped) is active. This mode is for
typical driving conditions where the Traction and TransCustom Mode
mission will be operating in their Street settings, which
The Custom Mode may be selected quickly by pushing
cannot be changed while in this mode. The Steering and
the SRT button on the instrument panel switch bank two
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
times, or pressing the “Custom” button on the touchscreen. Custom Mode allows the you to create a custom
configuration that is saved for quick selection of your
favorite settings. While in Custom Mode, the Power,
Traction, Transmission, Steering, Suspension, and Paddle
Shifter settings are shown in their current configuration.
While in the Custom Drive Mode screen, press the
“Custom Set-Up” button on the touchscreen to access the
selectable options. In the Custom Mode Set-Up screen the
individual current configuration will be displayed. Select
which mode suits your driving needs for a custom
driving experience.
Custom Mode Set-Up Info
Within the Custom Mode Set-Up screen, press the “info”
button on the touchscreen then use the left / right arrows
to scroll through all the available Drive Mode systems
giving you a description of their operation and current
configuration.
Custom Mode Set-Up — 6.2L Example
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
Power — If Equipped With 6.2L Supercharged Engine
NOTE: This selection is only available with the RED
RKE Key Fob.
• 500
Press the “500” button on the touchscreen to modify the
output power of the engine to 500.
NOTE: This selection is available with the RED or
BLACK RKE Key Fob.
Power — 6.2L Supercharged Engine Only
• 700+
Press the “700+” button on the touchscreen to modify the
output power of the engine to 700+.
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Transmission — If Equipped With 8 Speed
Transmission
• Sport
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide
faster shift speeds and will have a moderate comfort
trade-off.
• Street
Press the “Street” button on the touchscreen to provide a
balance of shift speed and comfort for typical daily
driving.
Transmission
• Track
Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to provide
the fastest shift speeds and will have the highest comfort
trade-off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
• OFF
Paddle Shifters
Press the “OFF” button on the touchscreen to disable
steering wheel paddle shifters.
Traction
4
Paddle Shifters
• ON
Press the “ON” button on the touchscreen to enable
steering wheel paddle shifters.
Traction
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Track
Suspension
Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to modify
traction control to optimize track performance with the
least stability control.
• Sport
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to turn off
traction control and reduce stability control.
• Street
Press the “Street” button on the touchscreen to provide
full traction control and full stability control.
Suspension
• Track
Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to provide
the firmest possible suspension stiffness with the highest
amount of comfort trade-off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
• Sport
Steering — If Equipped With 6.4L Engine
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide a
firmer suspension stiffness with moderate comfort tradeoff.
• Street
4
Press the “Street” button on the touchscreen to provide a
balance of suspension stiffness and ride comfort for
typical daily driving.
Steering
• Track
Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to adjust the
steering effort to the highest level.
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Sport
Race Options
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to adjust the
steering effort to the higher level.
• Street
Press the “Street⬙ button on the touchscreen to adjust the
steering effort to the lowest level.
Race Options
Press the “Race Options” button on the touchscreen
while in the Drive Modes screen, to display the vehicle’s
Launch Control screen. Within Race Options, you can
activate, deactivate, and adjust the RPM values for the
Launch Control and Shift Light features.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Launch Control
WARNING!
Launch Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. It is recommended that this feature be
used in a controlled environment, and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
4
Activate Launch Control
Launch Control can be accessed by pushing the Launch
Control button on the instrument panel switch bank or
pushing the SRT button on the instrument panel switch
bank then selecting the “Race Options” button on the
touchscreen. Press the “Activate Launch Control” button
on the touchscreen to activate the feature. Press the
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Launch RPM Set-Up” to set the holding RPM. Launch
Mode can be turned on or off by either pushing the
Launch Control button on the instrument panel switch
bank (if activated), or by pressing the “Cancel Launch
Mode” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: Launch RPM Set-Up cannot be accessed unless
Launch Mode is deactivated.
Launch RPM Set-Up — Manual Transmission
To adjust the Launch RPM, drag the slider bar or press
the arrows on the touchscreen to adjust the holding RPM.
The launch RPM limits will vary between the automatic
transmissions (1500–3500 RPM) and manual transmissions (2000–4500 RPM).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
For further information refer to “Drive Modes” in “Start- the Driver Information Display (DID). Pressing the “Shift
Light RPM Set-Up” button on the touchscreen will take
ing and Operating”.
you to the Shift Light RPM Set-Up screen.
Shift Light
4
Shift Light
Shift Light RPM Set-Up
The Shift Light RPM Set-Up allows you to set the shift
To actuate the Shift Light feature, press the “Shift Light”
light to actuate for gears 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5-8 (automatic
button on the touchscreen, then press the “Shift Light
transmission) 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5–6 (manual transmission).
On” button on the touchscreen. Activation is shown on
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Pressing and releasing the up/down arrow buttons on Valet Mode
the touchscreen above and below each listed gear, the
RPM values will change in increments of 250 RPM.
Pressing and holding the arrows will change the RPM
values in increments of 500 RPM, ranging from 2000–
6000 RPM. The Shift Light setup screen may only be
accessed if the feature is enabled, press the “Reset to
factory default” button on the touchscreen to change
back to factory settings, or press the “Shift Light Off”
button on the touchscreen to turn the system off completely.
Valet Mode Activation
To enter Valet Mode press the “Valet” button on the
touchscreen and a popup screen will ask you if you
would like to enter Valet Mode, after selecting “Yes” you
will be asked to enter a 4 digit PIN code. The PIN code is
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
not set, so you are free to select any 4 digit numeric
combination that will be easy to remember.
While in Valet Mode the following vehicle configurations
are set and locked to prevent unauthorized modification:
• Engine limited to the lowest power output state.
4
• Transmission locks out access to first gear and upshifts earlier than normal.
• Traction, Steering, and Suspension are set to their
STREET settings.
• Steering wheel paddle shifters are disabled.
Valet Mode Deactivation
• The Drive Mode interface is not available. Pressing the To exit Valet Mode you must enter the same 4 digit PIN
SRT button on the touchscreen will display the unlock that was used to enter the mode. The unlock keypad can
keypad.
be accessed by either pushing the SRT button on the
faceplate, or pressing the “Valet Mode Active – Press
• The ESC Off button is disabled.
Here to Exit” button on the touchscreen.
• The Launch Control button is disabled.
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Valet Mode Deactivation key pad will then prompt
you for your 4 digit PIN code, enter your PIN code and
press the “OK” button on the touchscreen. Your vehicle
will return to the default state after a key cycle.
NOTE: If your 4 digit PIN is lost or forgotten, the vehicle
will exit Valet Mode after a battery disconnect for approximately one minute. Reconnect the battery and cycle
the ignition to the RUN position, the vehicle will be in
Default Mode.
Valet Mode Deactivation PIN
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
ECO Mode — If Equipped With Automatic
Transmission
performance. Increased engine exhaust noise and/or
vibration may be noticed while Eco is active. This is
normal and a result of the increased amount of operating
conditions where the vehicle is allowed to operate in four
cylinder shutoff mode (6.4L Only).
The Paddle Shifters will be disabled while in Eco mode.
• Changing the Drive Mode will deactivate Eco.
• Eco will be disabled when another Drive Mode is
selected or “Eco” button is pressed.
UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
Eco Mode
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual.
Press the “Eco” button on the touchscreen on the SRT iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Drive Modes main menu. Eco mode modifies the vehicle’s engine and transmission settings to provide im- This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
proved fuel economy at a trade-off with acceleration plugged into the USB port.
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Located in the front storage area of the center console, iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod
this feature allows an iPod/MP3 player, or an external and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may
USB device, to be connected to the audio system.
not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect User’s
Manual.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
USB/AUX/SD Card Ports
1 — Aux Jack
2 — USB Port
3 — SD Card Slot
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/AUX
etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
push-button in the center and controls the volume and The button located in the center of the left-hand control
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker will tune to the next preset station that you have proswitch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom grammed in the radio preset button.
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile device operation when
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
not using Uconnect (if equipped).
track on the selected media (AUX, Bluetooth, SD Card).
Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the Regulatory And Safety Information
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the
USA/CANADA
previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
current track begins to play.
Media Mode
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
Under certain conditions, the mobile device being on in body.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated found in radio frequency safety standards and recomby relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does community.
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,
the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask
for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie • If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de liby turning the equipment off and on, the user is
cence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouilmore of the following measures:
lage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
for help.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This system
can be operated through either the controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect system display.
When the Uconnect system is in different modes (Radio,
Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the display.
General Overview
Buttons On The Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect screen.
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect system screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
1. MAX A/C Button
this function will cause the system to switch between
Press and release to change the current setting, the manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing Operation” for more information.
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). 7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window 8.4 Only)
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
turns off after 10 minutes.
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
for warmer temperature settings.
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
10. Blower Control
automatically exit Sync.
Button Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen
slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow
as follows:
for cooler temperature settings.
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
automatically exit Sync.
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
9. SYNC
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the control knob counterclockwise.
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
8. Passenger Temperature
(Uconnect 8.4 Radio Only)
Control
Down
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets
and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for warmer temperaPress and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ture settings.
ON/OFF.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
8.4 Only)
time.
Provides the driver with independent temperature conClimate Control Functions
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the A/C (Air Conditioning)
temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
temperature settings.
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time. cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect 8.4 the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
Only)
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature
12. Climate Control OFF Button
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
when MAX A/C is ON.
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
of the windows.
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed.
Recirculation
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lohigh humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
recirculation
indicator will illuminate when this button is
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
selected.
Press
the button a second time to turn off the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
MAX A/C
NOTE:
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and paslead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
senger temperature buttons on the faceplate or butfeature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
tons on the touchscreen. Once the desired temperature
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
is displayed, the system will achieve and automation the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
cally maintain that comfort level.
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
not necessary to change the temperature. You will
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
the system to function automatically.
and then turn off.
NOTE:
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
Automatic Operation
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the
as possible.
“AUTO” button on the touchscreen.
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the Uconnect customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect System Settings” in this
section of the manual.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automatically.
Manual Operation Override
Operating Tips
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control. suggested control settings for various weather condiThe blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by tions.
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Summer Operation
Vacation Storage
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
is not recommended because it may cause window windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side winfogging.
dow fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side windows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather.
Winter Operation
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
A/C Air Filter
• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
periods, as fogging may occur.
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati- “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruccally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or tions.
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 or
8.4A/8.4AN system.
Key Features:
• 5” touchscreen
• Three buttons on either side of the display
Uconnect 8.4AN
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 8.4A system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing
instructions.
4
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
Uconnect Voice Command
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first 1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Repush either the VR or Phone button, wait until after ceive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
8.4A/8.4AN Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts Functions.
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice 3 — Push To End Call
Command from current category.
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
4
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your AUX or USB device. Your Voice
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Media
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
Phone
song and genre information is displayed.
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of
the following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
4
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
button
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
and say Listen. (Must have comthe Phone button
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa. After the beep, say: “Reply.” tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advanthe Phone button
tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat UconnectPhone.com.
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
prompts.
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
No.
Okay.
Call me.
I’ll call you
later.
I’m on my way.
I’m lost.
Stuck in traffic.
Start without
me.
Where are you?
Are you there
yet?
I need
directions.
Can’t talk right
now.
See you later.
I’ll be late.
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
Thanks.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but
if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsfree and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
iPhone Notification Setting
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on
the Uconnect 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate
navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
the beep, say:
. After
• For the 8.4A Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
. After Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Roadside Assistance Call
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
WiFi Hotspot***
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
**If vehicle is equipped.
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
***Extra charges apply.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Vehicle Health Alert
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Remote Vehicle Start**
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website (moparownerconnect.com).
Remote Horn and Lights
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
Yelp Search
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Voice Texting
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
” button on the touchscreen to
press the “Apps
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information please visit www.driveuconnect.com
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your
vehicle and handle all of the details.
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and
press Link.
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth,
pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you
want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream
your personalized music.
NOTE:
Mobile App
To link your internet radio accounts:
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile
device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app.
• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply
visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
• Once you download the app to your compatible
mobile device, you will also be able to start your
vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually anywhere.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After
to send a personalized text message. For details about
the beep, say the following command: “Send mesMAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
sage to John Smith.”
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
process your message.
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP:
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN)
iPhone Notification Setting
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchscreen,
, then say: “YELP search.”
push the VR button
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect to find.
4
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
Yelp
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
SiriusXM Travel Link
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send text messages, schedule meetings, set
reminders, and more. For further information go to the
Mopar Owner Connect website (moparownerconnect.com).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being interWith Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
rupted by incoming calls.
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your conve- NOTE:
nience there is a counter display to keep track of your
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPmissed calls and text messages while you were using Do
hones.
Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text • Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call
Do Not Disturb
and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.” Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
Uconnect System Support:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with • U.S. residents call 877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days
a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli• Canadian residents call 800-465-2001 (English) or
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
device.
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci- Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
fications were met.
Sun., Closed
Additional Information
Uconnect Access Services Support 855-792-4241 Please
© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call.
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .367
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . .360
▫ Six-Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . .367
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .360
▫ Shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ 1–4 Skip Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .367
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .374
5
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
䡵 POWER STEERING — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
䡵 AUTOSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
▫ Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or
Console Mounted Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
䡵 DRIVE MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . .402
▫ Launch Mode — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . .403
▫ Guidelines For Track Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .396 䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .405
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .406
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Brake System Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . .408
䡵 POWER STEERING — 6.4L ENGINE . . . . . . . . .399
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ All Season Tires — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .418
▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
▫ Rainy Brake Support (RBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .424
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .426
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .431
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .440
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .440
▫ Tire Rotation — Same Tire Size On Front And
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
5
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Rotation — Different Tire Size On Front
And Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .442
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ 6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine . . . . . . . .448
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . .
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . .
. . . .455
. . . .455
. . . .456
. . . .456
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .450
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .458
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. If
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode,
remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
(Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
5
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle.
This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
Normal Starting With Integrated Key — Manual
Transmission
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
Press the clutch pedal fully to the floor, and cycle the
ignition switch to the START position and release when
the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 15
seconds, place the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and
damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a
discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow the
procedure carefully. Refer to “Jump-Starting” in “What
To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly place the ignition in the START position
and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter
motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails
to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10
seconds. If this occurs, place the ignition in the LOCK/
OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Enter-N-Go
This feature allows the driver to operate
the ignition switch with the push of a
button, as long as the ENGINE START/
STOP button is installed and the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go Key
Fob is in the passenger compartment.
5
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button —
Automatic Transmission Only
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button —
Manual Transmission Only
1. Press and hold the clutch pedal while pushing and
holding the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. Release the button when the engine starts. If the
vehicle fails to start within 15 seconds, release the
button, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
Starting” procedure.
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
3. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
the engine starting, release the button.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
the engine starting, push the button again.
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine pedal.
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then push and release
OFF position.
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
START/STOP Button — Manual Transmission
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/ Only
STOP button must be held for two seconds or three
1. With the vehicle stopped, place the shift lever in
short pushes in a row and vehicle speed must be above
NEUTRAL, then push and release the ENGINE
5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The
START/STOP button.
ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position
until the vehicle is stopped, placed PARK and the button 2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the shift lever is
3. Place the shift lever in first gear or REVERSE and then
not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button is
apply the parking brake.
pushed once, the Driver Information Display (DID) will
display a “VEHICLE NOT IN PARK” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button — Automatic Transmission
Only
5
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions — With Driver’s
Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK
• If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the
Or NEUTRAL Position)
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC and RUN.
position.
To change the ignition switch positions without starting the
• If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position, the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps starting
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) and
1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
the engine is not running.
change the ignition switch to the ACC position,
• If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position,
seconds or three short pushes in a row before the
engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will 3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
remain in the ACC position until the vehicle is
return the ignition switch to the OFF position.
stopped, placed in park and the button is pushed twice
to the OFF position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
5
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) — Automatic Transmission
Only
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) — Manual Transmission
Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the brake pedal, press the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the clutch pedal, press the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then push and hold the
ENGINE START/STOP button for no more than 15
seconds. Release the accelerator pedal and the clutch
pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a Six-Speed Manual Transmission
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located near the air box.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
5
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control System/Hill Start Assist” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
• Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor
may cause increased shift efforts, and may result in
damage to the clutch and transmission.
• Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while
driving, as this may result in transmission synchronizer damage.
• Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear
wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Damage to the transmission may occur.
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid
warms up. This is normal.
Manual Shifter
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
NOTE:
• Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain,
you may hear your transmission. This can be most
noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL
with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it
may also be heard when driving at low engine RPM.
Also, this may be more noticeable when the transmission is warm. This is a normal condition and is not an
indication of a problem with your clutch or transmission.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse
inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help
prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete stop,
you may notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE with
the ignition switch in the ON position (RUN position
for Keyless Enter-N-Go) as compared to the LOCK
position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go). This is
normal operation of the transmission reverse inhibitor Shifting
system.
Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the
clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage
to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not
fully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator
pedal when shifting.
5
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that
centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear. This
spring helps you know which gear you are in when you
are shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second
or downshifting from sixth to fifth.
The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and
fourth gear. Make sure you move the shift lever into
second or fifth gear. If you let the shift lever move in the
direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first
to fourth or from sixth to third gear.
CAUTION!
Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete
stop before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so
may result in transmission damage.
You must always use first gear (or REVERSE) when
starting from a standing position.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in recommended shift speed chart.
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
Engine
6.2L Supercharged
6.4L
MANUAL TRANSMISSION RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS
1-4
4-5
mph
20
25
(km/h)
(32)
(40)
mph
20
37
(km/h)
(32)
(59)
5-6
42
(67)
48
(77)
Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively (41°C), vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h)
but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the transmission is
steady speeds) may result in increased fuel economy.
in first gear, and the accelerator is at ¼ throttle or less.
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
After you shift the transmission to fourth gear, you can
acceleration rate.
press the clutch in and shift to another forward gear.
1–4 Skip Shift
There are times when you must shift the transmission Downshifting
directly from first gear to fourth gear instead of from first To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, downgear to second gear. This is to help you get the best shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep
possible fuel economy from your vehicle. This occurs grade.
when the engine coolant (antifreeze) is higher than 106°F
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Skipping more than one gear while downshifting,
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You
could have a collision.
CAUTION!
• If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high an engine speed, you
could damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
• Do not downshift into first gear when the vehicle is
moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), as you could
damage the engine and/or clutch.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK or the manual
transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the parking brake, turn the engine OFF, remove the
key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle
when the ignition is in the OFF mode, the automatic transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in
the OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
on the shift lever and in the Driver Information Display
(DID).
To select a gear range, press the lock button on the shift
lever and move the lever rearward or forward. You must
also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
Automatic Transmission Shifter
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL (Autostick) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the Autostick shift
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information). Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or
rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position
(beside the DRIVE position) will manually select the
transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.
5
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-)
position (beside the DRIVE position). In MANUAL
(AutoStick) mode, the transmission gear is displayed in
the instrument cluster (as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the
shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position of an automatic
transmission as a substitute for the parking brake.
Always apply the parking brake fully when parked
to guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK (automatic transmission).
Check by trying to move the transmission gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the automatic transmission is in PARK
before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift an
automatic transmission into PARK, or a manual
transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE, turn
the engine OFF, apply the parking brake, and
remove the ignition key. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless ignition
node is in “OFF” mode. When the ignition is in the
LOCK or OFF (key removal) mode, an automatic
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
CAUTION!
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must
start the engine and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
(Continued)
• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must
DRIVE (D)
leave the vehicle.
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downWARNING!
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characterispractices that limit your response to changing traffic tics under all normal operating conditions.
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
vehicle and have a collision.
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain or traveling into strong head winds),
5
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
use the AutoStick shift control (refer to ⬙AutoStick⬙ in this
section for further information) to select a lower gear.
Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as
vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
MANUAL (M)
the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in
the instrument cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
indicate what actions may be necessary.
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position) enables full manual control of transmission
shifting (also known as AutoStick mode; refer to
“AutoStick” in this section for further information). Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) while in In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
the MANUAL (AutoStick) position will manually select can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps.
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
service is required.
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine AUTOSTICK
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or
Console Mounted Shifter
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
operation.
and improve overall vehicle performance.
5. Restart the engine.
5
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
This system can also provide you with more control Operation
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, When the shift lever is in the DRIVE (D) position, the
mountain driving, and many other situations.
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the eight available gears. To activate AutoStick, move the
shift lever into the MANUAL (M) position (beside the
DRIVE position). The current transmission gear will be
displayed in the instrument cluster, along with a highlighted ⬙M⬙ (Manual) indication. When the shift lever is
in the MANUAL (M) position, tap the shift lever forward
(-) (or tap the (-) shift paddle on the steering wheel) to
downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, (or tap
the lever rearward (+) or tap the (+) shift paddle), to
command an upshift.
Paddle Shifters
1 — (–) Shift Paddle
2 — (+) Shift Paddle
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
NOTE: Tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift • In temporary AutoStick mode (shift lever in DRIVE),
paddles (+/-), while the shift lever is in DRIVE, will
the transmission will automatically shift up when
maximum engine speed is reached. Lack of accelerator
activate a temporary AutoStick mode. Tapping (-) to
pedal activity will cause the transmission to revert to
enter AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to
automatic operation.
the next lower gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick
mode will retain the current gear. The current gear will be
• If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (shift lever in
displayed in the instrument cluster, but the ⬙M⬙ will not
MANUAL position), manual gear selection will be
be highlighted. The transmission will revert back to
maintained until the shift lever is returned to DRIVE,
normal operation (if the shift lever remains in DRIVE)
or as described below. The transmission will not
after a period of time, depending on accelerator pedal
upshift automatically at redline in this mode, nor will
activity.
downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is
pressed to the floor.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
(using the shift lever, or the shift paddles), unless an
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It
display the current gear.
will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or
downshift is chosen, except as described below.
5
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first • The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
fault or overheat condition is detected.
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the shift lever to the
vehicle is accelerated.
DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear. the shift lever is already in DRIVE) until “D” is once
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second again indicated in the instrument cluster. You can shift in
gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking
snowy or icy conditions.
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed, or holding the shift
lever in the (-) position, will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is engaged.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
DRIVE MODES
Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a SRT Drive Mode
feature. This feature gives the driver control over the
systems in the vehicle which affect its performance,
enabling the driver to tune it for desired driving scenarios. Below are the modes of operation:
NOTE: Refer to “Drive Modes” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further descriptions of these
modes.
5
Drive Modes
• TRACK MODE — This mode is a predefined configuration optimized for typical track driving. The ABS,
Transmission, Steering, and Suspension systems are all
set to their TRACK settings. Steering wheel mounted
paddle shifters are enabled.
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
• SPORT MODE — This mode is a predefined configuration optimized for typical enthusiast driving. The
ABS, Transmission, Steering, and Suspension systems
are all set to their SPORT settings. Steering wheel
mounted paddle shifters are enabled.
• CUSTOM MODE — This mode allows the driver to
create a custom vehicle configuration that is saved for
quick selection of favorite settings. The system will
return to Default mode when the ignition switch is
cycled from RUN to OFF to RUN, if this mode is
selected. While in Custom Mode the Traction, Transmission, Steering, Suspension and Paddle shifter setCustom Mode Set-Up
tings may be configured through the custom mode
Listed below is a description of each of these settings:
set-up in any combination.
Transmission (Trans)
• Track — provides the fastest shift speeds and has the
highest comfort trade-off.
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
• Sport — provides a faster shift speed and has a Suspension (Susp)
moderate comfort trade-off.
• Track — provides the firmest possible suspension
stiffness with the highest amount of comfort trade-off.
• Street — provides a balance of shift speed and comfort
for typical daily driving.
• Sport — provides a firmer suspension stiffness with
Paddles — If Equipped
moderate comfort trade-off.
• On — enables steering wheel mounted paddle shifters. • Street — provides a balance of suspension stiffness
and ride comfort for typical daily driving.
• Off — disables steering wheel mounted paddle shiftSteering — 6.4L Engine Only
ers.
• Track — provides the greatest amount of steering
feedback, requiring the highest amount of steering
• Track — modifies traction control to optimize track
effort.
performance with the least stability control.
• Sport — provides greater steering feedback, requiring
• Sport — turns off traction control and reduces stability
greater steering effort.
control.
• Street — provides a balance of steering feedback and
• Street — provides full traction control and full stability
steering effort.
control.
Traction
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine Power — 6.2L Supercharged Engine Only
• 700+ HP — Provides engine output power to 700+
horsepower.
NOTE: This selection is only available with the RED RKE
Key Fob “700+ HP”.
assist and Suspension (active dampening system) stiffness may be configured to either the STREET, SPORT
or TRACK settings within this mode. Steering wheel
mounted paddle shifters may be enabled or disabled
while in this mode as well.
• VALET MODE — To enter this mode the operator
must select it from the Drive Modes interface and enter
a four digit PIN code. The PIN code is not predetermined, so the operator is free to select any four digit
NOTE: This selection is available with the RED or
numeric combination that will be easy to remember.
BLACK RKE Key Fob “500 HP”.
While in Valet Mode the following vehicle configurations are set and locked to prevent unauthorized
modification:
• DEFAULT MODE — This mode will be activated
automatically when restarting the vehicle unless Valet
• Engine limited to a lowest power output state.
mode or ECO mode (if equipped) is active. This mode
is for typical driving conditions where the ABS and • Transmission locks out access to first gear and shifts
earlier than normal.
Transmission will be operating in their STREET settings, which cannot be changed while in this mode.
The Steering (electric power steering — if equipped)
• 500 HP — Provides engine output power to 500
horsepower.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
• Traction, Steering and Suspension are forced to • Eco (Automatic Transmission only) — Eco modifies
STREET settings.
the vehicle’s engine and transmission settings to provide improved fuel economy at a trade-off with accel• Steering wheel mounted paddle shifters are disabled.
eration performance. Increased engine exhaust noise
• The SRT Drive Modes are not available. Pushing the
and/or vibration may be noticed while Eco is active,
SRT button will display the unlock keypad.
this is normal and will not damage the vehicle.
• The ESC Off button is disabled.
NOTE: Changing the Drive Mode will deactivate Eco.
5
• The Launch Control button is disabled.
NOTE:
Launch Mode — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system
that is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum
vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is a
form of traction control that manages tire slip while
launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use
during race events on a closed course where consistent
• The vehicle will restart with VALET active if VALET quarter mile and zero to sixty times are desired. The
system is not intended to compensate for lack of driver
was active when the vehicle was last shut down.
experience or familiarity with the race track. Use of this
• To exit VALET Mode the operator must enter the same
four digit PIN that was used to enter the mode. The
unlock keypad can be accessed by either pushing the
SRT button or selecting to disable Valet on the
Uconnect touchscreen.
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
feature in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions • Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved
may results in excess wheel slip outside this systems
road surfaces only. Use on slippery or loose surfaces
may cause damage to vehicle components and is not
control resulting in an aborted launch.
recommended.
NOTE: Launch mode is not available within the first 500
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
miles of engine break-in.
Preconditions:
Launch Control is only available when the following
procedure is followed:
• Launch control should not be used on public roads.
Always check track conditions and the surrounding 1. Push the LAUNCH button on the center stack switch
bank.
area.
• Launch Control is not available for the first 500 miles NOTE: Pushing the SRT button on the center stack or
pressing the “Apps” button on the touchscreen are two
of the vehicle’s life.
other options to access launch control features. Please
• Launch Control should only be used when the engine refer to “Drive Modes” in “Understanding Your Instruand transmission are at operating temperature.
ment Panel” for further information.
2. Press the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button on the touchscreen. This screen will allow you to adjust your
launch RPM’s for optimum launch/traction.
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
3. Press the “Activate Launch Mode” button on the 9. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
touchscreen.
Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches
62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the ESC system will
4. Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
return to its current ESC mode.
5. Make sure the steering wheel is pointing straight.
Launch control will abort before launch completion,
6. Hold the brake and make sure the vehicle is in display “Launch Aborted” in the cluster under any the
“Drive”.
following conditions:
7. While holding the brake, rapidly apply the accelerator • The accelerator pedal is released during launch.
pedal to wide open throttle. The engine speed will
hold at the RPM that was set in the “Launch RPM • The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer
moving in a straight line.
Set-up” screen.
NOTE: Messages will appear in the Driver Information • The “ESC OFF” button is pressed to change the system
to another mode.
Display (DID) to inform the driver if one or more of the
above conditions have not been met.
NOTE: After launch control has been aborted, ESC will
8. When conditions 4 through 7 have been met, the return to its current ESC mode.
Driver Information Display (DID) will read “Launch
Ready Release Brake”.
5
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
4. Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
Vehicles with a manual transmission have an adjustable
launch RPM controlled through the Uconnect system.
5. Make sure the steering wheel is pointing straight.
Launch Control is only available when the following
procedure is followed:
6. Fully depress the clutch pedal and make sure the
vehicle is in first gear.
7. While holding the clutch depressed, rapidly apply the
accelerator pedal to wide open throttle. The engine
speed will hold at the pre-selected launch RPM. The
engine speed will hold at the RPM that was set in the
NOTE: Pushing the SRT button on the center stack or
“Launch RPM Set-up” screen.
pressing the “Apps” button on the touchscreen are two
other options to access launch control features. Please NOTE: Messages will appear in the Driver Information
refer to “Uconnect Settings” within your Owner’s Display (DID) to inform the driver if one or more of the
Manual on the DVD for further information.
above conditions have not been met.
1. Pushing the “LAUNCH” button on the center stack
switch bank.
2. Press the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button on the touch- 8. When conditions 4 through 7 have been met, the
screen. This screen will allow you to adjust your
Driver Information Display (DID) will read “Launch
launch RPM’s for optimum launch/traction.
Ready Release Clutch”. Release the clutch quickly and
3. Press the “Activate Launch Mode” button on the
touchscreen.
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
continue to hold wide open throttle to launch execute • The “ESC OFF” button is pushed to change the ESC
shifts. Refer to “Manual Transmission – Shifting” in
system to another mode.
this section for further information.
NOTE: After launch control has been aborted, ESC will
Release the clutch and continue to hold wide open return to its current ESC mode.
throttle to launch.
9. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches
62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the ESC system will
return to its current ESC mode.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels are
spinning and do not have traction. Damage to the
transmission may occur.
Launch control will abort before launch completion, Guidelines For Track Use
display “Launch Aborted” in the cluster and return to
NOTE: Because of the extreme conditions encountered
ESC Full ON under any the following conditions:
during track use, any damage or wear associated with
• The brake is applied during launch.
track use is not covered by warranty.
• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer • If your SRT vehicle is equipped with Drive Modes they
moving in a straight line.
will alter the vehicle’s performance in various driving
5
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
•
•
•
situations. It is recommended that your vehicle oper- • If equipped with a removable lower front fascia grille,
ates in SPORT or TRACK modes during the track
it is recommended to remove it for track use during
warm/hot weather to improve cooling airflow to
event.
critical powertrain and cooling system components.
Prior to each track event/day, verify all fluids are at
the correct levels. Refer to “Fluid Capacities” in “Main- • All SRT vehicles are track tested for 24 hours of
endurance, however, it is recommended that suspentaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
sion system, brake system, prop shaft, and ½ shaft
Prior to each track event, verify the front and rear
boots should be checked for wear or damage after
brake pads have more than ½ pad thickness remainevery track event.
ing. If the brake pads require changing, please burnish
• Track usage results in increased operating temperaprior to track outing at full pace.
tures of the engine, transmission, clutch – if equipped,
At the conclusion of each track event, it is recomdriveline and brake system. This may affect noise
mended that a brake bleed procedure is performed to
(NVH) countermeasures designed into your vehicle.
maintain the pedal feel and stopping capability of your
New components may need to be installed to return
Brembo High Performance brake system.
the system to the original NVH performance.
It is recommended that each track outing should end
• Tire pressure:
with a minimum of 1 cool down lap using minimal
• 40psi (276kpa) hot, recommend 32psi (221kpa) front,
braking.
30psi (207 kpa) rear cold
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
do a two lap cool down with minimal brake applies.
NOTE: It is recommended that you target 40psi (276kpa)
Hot Tire Pressure at the conclusion of each track session.
Make sure the brakes are not smoking. If they are, do
another cool down lap.
Starting at 32psi (221kpa) Front & 30psi (207 kpa) Rear
Cold and adjusting based on ambient & track conditions
3. Do not continue for more than 1 full burnishing lap
is recommended. Tire pressure can be monitored via the
after you start smelling the brakes. Do not get them
Driver Information Display (DID) and can assist with
smoking heavily. This will get them too hot and affect
adjustments.
their life negatively in future track use.
4. Allow vehicle to sit and cool in the paddock for at least
30 min. If an infrared thermal gun is available, allow
To avoid “green lining fade” during track use, the brake
rotors to cool to 200°F (93.3°C) before going back out.
pads and rotors must have a thermal burnish for factory
installed components or when new brake friction com- 5. There should be a thin, ash layer when inspecting the
pads installed in the caliper. Having the ash layer go
ponents are installed:
more than half the thickness of the pad material
1. Use one track session to burnish brakes by driving at
indicates too aggressive of a burnish.
75% speed. Brake at approximately 0.60-0.80g max
without ABS intervention.
Track burnishing your brakes:
2. Lap the track in this manner until you start smelling
the brakes. Continue for another ½ lap at speed, then
5
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Sometimes, a second burnish session is required. If the DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
pads start smelling in the next track session, reduce
Acceleration
speed and braking decel to burnish targets and follow
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slipstep 2-4.
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
7. New pads installed on old rotors still need to be erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
burnished. New rotors installed with old pads should when there is a difference in the surface traction under
be burnished at the track or street driven for 300 city the rear (driving) wheels.
miles to develop an adequate lining transfer layer on
the rotor surface prior to track use.
WARNING!
8. Rotors that pulsate during track use should be replaced. Resurfacing of the rotors is not recommended,
as it removes mass from the rotor, reducing its thermal
capacity. Resurfacing also thins the rotor cheek, making it less robust and increasing the likelihood of
pulsation in further track use.
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate,
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling.
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping DRIVING THROUGH WATER
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precauDriving through water more than a few inches/
tions should be observed:
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
slushy.
Traction
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
CAUTION!
• Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
• Due to lower ground clearance, driving your vehicle up steep driveways, approach ramps or near
parking blocks may cause damage to the front
fascia and ground effects.
• Driving through snow more than 4 inches (100 mm)
deep may cause damage to the front fascia and
ground effects.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
5
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
POWER STEERING — 6.4L ENGINE
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
ability to steer the vehicle manually.
5
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected NOTE:
through the Uconnect System. Refer to the “Drive
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
Modes” in this section for further information.
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
WARNING!
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
obtained as soon as possible.
service.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” or the “POWER
STEERING ASSIST OFF – SERVICE SYSTEM”
message is displayed within the Driver Information Display (DID), this indicates the vehicle needs to
be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to “Driver
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
POWER STEERING — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED
ENGINE
The hydraulic power steering system is sport tuned and
will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of
maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide
mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost.
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED
does not in any way damage the steering system.
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
5
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full • This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
functionality after a battery disconnect.
When the parking brake is applied and the ignition
switch is in the ON position (RUN position with Keyless
Enter-N-Go), the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
NOTE:
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK or REVERSE (manual transmission only) position.
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmis- The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
5
Manual Transmission Parking Brake Release
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park
brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time
and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
Automatic Transmission Parking Brake
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position of an automatic
transmission as a substitute for the parking brake.
Always apply the parking brake fully when parked
(Continued)
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
to guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the automatic transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
BRAKE SYSTEM
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high performance braking system. The brake pads are a semimetallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance
for consistent operation. A compromise to using this type
of brake pad is that the brakes may produce more brake
dust and may squeal slightly under certain weather and
operating conditions (i.e., during light brake applications) this is considered normal conditions.
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the “Brake Warning Light”.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
example, repeated brake applications with the engine Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes ElecOFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
with the power system operating.
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
5
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Braking (RAB), and Rain Brake Support (RBS).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
front axle.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
Brake System Warning Light
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such
stay on for as long as four seconds.
as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activacomes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
tion(s).
is not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
5
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifi- Brake Assist System (BAS)
cation may result in degraded ABS performance.
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensThe amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brakservice is required. However, the conventional brake ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
System Warning Light” is not on.
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
WARNING!
roll down the hill as normal.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing activate:
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
a manual transmission if the clutch is pressed HSA will
remain active.
WARNING! (Continued)
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Towing With HSA
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may
occur, such as on minor hills or with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a
substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive to
distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and
most importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
(Continued)
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
WARNING! (Continued)
incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with the DID, perform the
following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
• For vehicles equipped with the Driver Information
Display (DID), refer to “Driver Information Display 6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
bank below the climate control four times within
further information.
twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should
turn on and turn off two times.
5
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
additional slighty more than one-half turn to the right. wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
This system enhances directional control and stability of
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
its previous setting.
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
Traction Control System (TCS)
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. EnThis system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may maintain the desired path.
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differpath of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differenthe intended path, ESC applies the brake of the approtial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
understeer condition.
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS
is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
(Continued)
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode
may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation,
which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” NOTE:
will turn off.
• For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. MulWARNING!
tiple momentary button pushed may be required to
return to ESC On.
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de- • ⬙ESC Sport⬙ and ⬙ESC Track⬙ (if equipped) are ESC
scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and
partial off mode(s).
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power Full Off – If Equipped
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys- only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
tem is reduced.
this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the
the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound,
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
“ESC OFF” message will display in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). To turn ESC ON again,
momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE: System may switch from ESC Full Off to Partial
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
speed the system will return to ESC Full Off.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes – if
equipped.
WARNING! (Continued)
to assist in maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode
is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
• With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an
emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will
not engage to assist in maintaining stability. “Full
Off” mode is only intended for off-highway or
off-road use.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESC OFF Indicator Light
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency
evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
(Continued)
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this NOTE:
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momenspeeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authotarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
that caused the ESC activation.
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acThe “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
customer has elected to have the Electronic
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
WARNING!
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condispeed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMoccur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckoccurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as user’s safety or the safety of others.
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
or other vehicles.
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off” reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
available ESC modes.
the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system for a
panic stop.
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
Rainy Brake Support (RBS)
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Rainy Brake Support may improve braking performance Tire Markings
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rainy Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
5
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designaT145/80D18 103M.
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
NOTE:
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the
front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has
not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after
sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of
PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
Term
Maximum Inflation
Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire
Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation
pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on
the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures.
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
Tire And Loading Information Placard
5
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
spare tires.
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Loading
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you the weight referenced here.
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuAnd Operating” section of this manual.
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” secsengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
tion of this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
(Continued)
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability At least once a month:
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
NOTE:
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
may look properly inflated even when they are undererratic and unpredictable steering response.
inflated.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not outside temperature condition.
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sideTire Pressures For High Speed Operation
wall.
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condiof outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
temperature changes.
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- Radial Ply Tires
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatWARNING!
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
WARNING!
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. AlHigh speed driving with your vehicle under maxiways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
combine them with other types of tires.
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Tire Repair
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
75 mph (120 km/h).
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
additional information.
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immeroads are covered with ice or snow. For more informadiately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
All Season Tires — If Equipped
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
WARNING!
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
handling of your vehicle.
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states produring the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
checked before using these tire types.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi- Tire Spinning
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
only in sets of four; failure to do so spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
may adversely affect the safety and longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
handling of your vehicle.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what Emergencies” for further information.
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
Snow Tires
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
5
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
1 — Worn Tire
replaced.
Tire Tread
2 — New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire with oil, grease, and gasoline.
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread Replacement Tires
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
• Distance driven.
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manuhigher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivatread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main- lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
this manual for more information relating to the Load
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
are not recommended.
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. Remember, more frequent rotation is permissible if desired. Also, correct for anything
causing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the
tire rotation.
Tire Rotation — Same Tire Size On Front And
Rear Axle
5
The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped
with all season tires is the “forward-cross” as shown in
the following diagram.
Tire Rotation
Tire Rotation — Different Tire Size On Front And
Rear Axle
The suggested rotation method is the “side-to-side” as
shown in the following diagram. This method is required
due to different size tires on the front and rear of the
vehicle.
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
Tire Rotation
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
there should be no adjustment for this increased presThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the sure.
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
mended cold placard pressure.
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
“TPM Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will automatically update and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn
off once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “TPM
Telltale Light”. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
“TPM Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
5
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
(Continued)
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “TPM Telltale Light”.
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
or condition.
the tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
5
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module,
TPMS Display
• Four TPM sensors,
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Driver
Information Display (DID), and
The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tires. In addition, the Drivers Information Display (DID)
will display a “LOW TIRE” message and a graphic
• TPM Telltale Light
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
pressure values shown in a different color. An ⬙Inflate DID will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for
a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
Tire to XX⬙ message will also be displayed in the DID.
in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
not being received.
and inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition
(those shown in a different color in the DID graphic) to If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure infla- providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
tion value as shown in the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message. no longer exists, the “TPM Telltale Light” will no longer
Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
system will automatically update, the graphic display in longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
the DID will return the pressure values shown to their of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
original color, and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn off. following:
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
this information.
the TPM sensors.
Service TPMS Warning
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will
materials that may block radio wave signals.
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
wheel housings.
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
addition, the DID will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
sound, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID
the compact spare tire.
will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
in place of the pressure value.
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
“TPM Telltale Light” will remain ON and a chime will
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
sound. In addition, the graphic in the DID will still
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
display the low pressure values in a different color and
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in
the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message.
the DID will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active FUEL REQUIREMENTS
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
These engine are designed to meet all
TPMS to receive this information.
emissions regulations, provide optimal
General Information
fuel economy and performance when usThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
ing high-quality unleaded “Premium”
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
gasoline having a posted octane number of
following two conditions:
91 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or
higher octane “Premium” gasoline is required in these
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
engines.
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera- While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine
tion.
is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immeby the party responsible for compliance could void the diately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
octane number can cause engine failure and may void or
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxysymptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid- genates such as ethanol.
ering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door.
Fuel Fill Cap
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
cap is for use with this vehicle.
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities
into the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
NOTE:
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
VEHICLE LOADING
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Driver
Information Display (DID). If this occurs, tighten the fuel
filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER
button to turn off the message. If the problem continues,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started.
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further infor- The label contains the following information:
mation.
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
GVWR.
front and rear GAWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or it is not over the GVWR.
rear GAWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
separately. It is important that you distribute the load have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
the brakes operate.
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR
Loading
and GAWRs.
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items TRAILER TOWING
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheels OFF The
Ground
None
Front
Rear
All
Manual Transmission
Automatic Transmission
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED
OK
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Recreational towing (with rear wheels on the ground) is
NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle
trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.
Recreational towing (with rear wheels on the ground) is
NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle
trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.
Use of a towing dolly (with rear wheels on the ground) is
NOT ALLOWED, as severe transmission damage will
occur. Use of a towing dolly (with front wheels on the
ground) is not recommended, as vehicle damage may
occur.
Use of a towing dolly (with rear wheels on the ground) is
NOT ALLOWED, as severe transmission damage will
occur. Use of a towing dolly (with front wheels on the
ground) is not recommended, as vehicle damage may
occur.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . .470
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .462 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .476
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .466
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
6
462 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
panel.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc• On the highways — slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your an impending overheat condition:
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
other motorists.
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 463
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F
(116°C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–
230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F
(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
6
464 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
111 Ft-Lbs (150 N·m)
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
22 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 465
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Tire Service Kit
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
Torque Patterns
screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated approximately -4°F (-20°C).
against the wheel.
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
6
466 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Service Kit Storage
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.
Tire Service Kit Components
Tire Service Kit Location
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Sealant Bottle
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge
Power Button
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on
the bottom side of the Tire
Service Kit)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 467
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release
the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit.
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to
this position for air pump operation only. Use Using The Deflation Button
the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
this mode.
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
turn to this position to inject the Tire • Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose)
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
(6) when selecting this mode.
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
6
468 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
use. Always replace these components immediately at
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, • Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 469
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
(Continued)
6
470 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition
in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to 3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 471
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the tire.
valve stem.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
available. Make sure the engine is running before
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
6
472 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the pressure within 15 minutes:
Sealant Hose (6):
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflaseconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomHose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
empty.
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instruindicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
ment panel.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 473
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from
the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the
end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the
vehicle storage location. Quickly proceed to (D)
“Drive Vehicle.”
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
6
474 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
(E) After Driving:
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
opening.
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomvehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
stem.
Volt outlet.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
Gauge (3).
the vehicle.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
service center.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 475
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument 3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
panel after the tire has been repaired.
of it accordingly.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos- 4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authothe front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
using the Tire Service Kit.
bottle is locked into place.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
6
476 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
Preparations For Jump-Start
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and engine compartment for jump-starting.
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 477
WARNING!
Remote Battery Posts Locations
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift into PARK (automatic
transmission) or 1st gear (manual transmission) and
place the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
6
478 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
WARNING!
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 479
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
you should have the battery and charging system instart the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
spected at your authorized dealer.
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
(Continued)
6
480 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION! (Continued)
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission,
press and hold the lock button on the shift lever. Then
shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with
automatic transmission) or FIRST GEAR and REVERSE
(with manual transmission), while gently pressing the
accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without
spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts
between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at
wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than 2
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage
DRIVE or REVERSE.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 481
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE / 1ST GEAR and REVERSE, do not
spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
(Continued)
6
482 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),
a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
Console Storage Bin
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
tether strap up through the opening in the console
base.
2. Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual
Park Release lever.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 483
4. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the 5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged
lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing
position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and
it to the right.
rearward until it locks in place in the vertical position.
The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be moved.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
6
Locking Tab
Tether Strap
484 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side)
rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down, to its original position, until the locking tab
snaps into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the console storage bin.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 485
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The Ground
Flat Tow
NONE
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow
Front
Rear
ALL
Flatbed
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION/
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- vehicles under tow must be observed.
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
6
486 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmiswhile being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN sion is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all
four wheels on the ground) under the following condiposition, not the ACC position.
tions:
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may occur from improper
towing.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
occur.
Automatic Transmission
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to
⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section for instructions
on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when the
engine is off.
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30
miles (48 km), then the only acceptable method of
towing is with a flatbed truck.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 487
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all
four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section • The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission If the transmission is not operable, then the only acceptout of PARK for towing.
able method of towing is with a flatbed truck.
Manual Transmission
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.2L
SUPERCHARGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L
(392 HEMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .494
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
7
490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System
(Manual Transmission) — If Equipped. . . . . . .521
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .521
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .521
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with Halogen
Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
and Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High
Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
▫ Center Tail/Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .531
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .546
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .536
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ Fluid Capacities — 6.2L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Fluid Capacities — SRT 6.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND
GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
▫ Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
7
492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
Intercooler Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill
Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
8 — Air Cleaner Filter
9 — Power Steering Reservoir
10 — Engine Oil Dipstick
11 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
12— Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L (392 HEMI)
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
6 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
8 — Air Cleaner Filter
9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Loose Fuel Filler Cap
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
soon as possible.
”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Driver
Information Display (DID). If this occurs, tighten the fuel
filler cap properly and press the Trip Odometer button to
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495
turn off the message. If the problem continues, the serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacemessage will appear the next time the vehicle is started. ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
PROGRAMS
following:
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
not crank or start the engine.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- start this test over.
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
7
496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
happen:
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off REPLACEMENT PARTS
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ento the I/M station.
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, Limited Warranty.
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497
DEALER SERVICE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
7
498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
regular intervals, such as once a month. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 quart (.95
liters) of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the
“SAFE” range will result in an oil level at the top of the
“SAFE” range on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must Change Engine Oil
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only Engine Oil Viscosity
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the Use Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 engine or equivalent MOPAR
American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN.
oil meeting the FCA US Material Standard MS-12633 for
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra use in all operating temperatures.
0W-40 engine or equivalent MOPAR oil meeting the FCA The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
US Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
temperatures.
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine CompartThe engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informaoil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil tion.
filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Synthetic Engine Oils
Engine Oil Change Requirements — 6.2L
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom- Supercharged Engine (If Equipped)
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom- We recommend having your oil changed and vehicle
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes serviced by your authorized dealer. You should only
perform maintenance procedures and or repairs for
are followed.
which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade Your 6.2L Supercharged engine (if equipped) has a
unique engine oil system. The system contains a drain in
number should not be used.
the engine oil pan and the engine oil cooler. It is necesMaterials Added To Engine Oil
sary for the service technician to drain both the engine oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad- pan and the engine oil cooler to properly perform the
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to engine oil change procedure. Failure to drain the engine
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its oil cooler will result in overfilling your vehicle’s engine
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi- oil system.
tives.
NOTE: Do not overfill crankcase with engine oil, pressure loss or oil foaming can result.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501
To access these oil drains, the vehicle needs to be safely
lifted and supported to remove the front underbody
shields (belly pan). Your service technician will refer to
the Service Manual for proper under body shield (belly
pan) removal and installation procedures.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
attempting any procedure yourself.
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
7
502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Mainte- The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
nance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
intervals.
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the
trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine
compartment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
7
Battery Location
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
(Continued)
504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505
Air Conditioner Maintenance
WARNING! (Continued)
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
(Continued)
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by authorized dealer or other service
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorofacilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
A/C Air Filter
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
— If Equipped
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrothe retaining clips.
fluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507
7
Access Door
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
Filter Access Cover
3. Remove the used filter.
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
A/C Air Filter
5. Close the filter access cover.
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
maintenance intervals.
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509
Windshield Wiper Blades
Adding Washer Fluid
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
flush out the residual water.
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
from a dry windshield.
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perforcontainers.
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
7
510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
the Driver’s Information Display (DID).
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time
WARNING!
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Commercially available windshield washer solvents Replace as required.
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
WARNING!
the washer solution.
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
Exhaust System
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
system.
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
information.
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside
the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle
(Continued)
is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
(Continued)
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
7
512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
NOTE: Your vehicles exhaust system may be equipped
with an Electronic Exhaust Valve (EEV) system, if the
exhaust system is replaced with aftermarket products a
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may be illuminated.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or place the ignition in the
LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-NGo). The fan is temperature controlled and can start
at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position
(RUN position for Keyless Enter-N-Go).
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513
WARNING! (Continued)
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Check the coolant recovery bottle and/or the supercharger coolant recovery bottle (if equipped with the 6.2L
Supercharged engine) tubing for brittle rubber, cracking,
tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the bottle
and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
Coolant Checks
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REmonths (before the onset of freezing weather, where
MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
7
514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
Selection Of Coolant
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
CAUTION!
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) envisible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
MS.90032).
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
NOTE: If equipped with the 6.2L Supercharged engine
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) enthe intercooler must be vacuum flushed and filled. If any
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatcoolant is needed to be added to the system please
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
contact your local authorized dealer.
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
maintenance intervals.
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515
CAUTION! (Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentracoolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that altions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool(−37°C) are anticipated.
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
Adding Coolant
7
516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Caps
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could NOTE: Be sure you do not mix the engine coolant system
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is pressure cap with the intercooler system pressure cap
needed to be added to the system, please contact your these caps are not interchangeable.
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle
should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check be checked once a month.
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
7
518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
•
Points To Remember
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
from the front of the engine compartment. This is norMS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporcomponents.
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
condenser clean.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
if the “Brake Warning Light” indicates system failure.
Brake System
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when perIn order to assure brake system performance, all brake forming underhood services.
system components should be inspected periodically.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the “MAX”
maintenance intervals.
mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
7
520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Refer to “Flucontainer to avoid contamination from foreign matter or ids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
moisture.
Clutch Hydraulic System (Manual Transmission)
— If Equipped
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated
volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder
reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Change Transmission Fluid
If contaminated with water, change the fluid immediately. See your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section
side of the transmission. The fluid level should be 1/4
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
inch (6.4mm) below the bottom of the fill hole. Add fluid,
Fluid Level Check
7
522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom- transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
mended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any may adversely affect seals.
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmisany special additives in the transmission. Automatic sion has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and transmission fluid level using special service tools.
its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
Special Additives
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Rear Axle
Fluid Level Check
Checking the fluid level while the vehicle is on level
ground and has been stationary for 15 minutes will
improve the accuracy of the fluid level reading.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
axle. The fluid level should be 1-2.5 mm below the fill
Fluid And Filter Changes
plug. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
life of the vehicle.
Change Axle Fluid
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
7
524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
What Causes Corrosion?
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
resistance built into your vehicle.
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and Tar Remover to remove.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
7
526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permapackaged and sealed.
nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to this finish.
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR Wheel Cleaner.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner: carpeting.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
with a clean, dry towel.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
leather upholstery.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
7
528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth or micro-fiber towel. A
mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial
wipe clean with a clean damp cloth.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win- 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
Seat Belt Maintenance
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
scratch the elements.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
directly on the mirror.
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care buckles do not work properly.
Glass Surfaces
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
7
530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531
Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays.
Front Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
7
532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
1
2
3
Cartridge Fuse
–
40 Amp Green
50 Amp Red
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
11
12
13
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
–
Description
Fuse – Spare
Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
Electric Power Steering #1 – If Equipped / Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) – If Equipped
Starter
Electronic Stability Control
Electronic Stability Control
Police Ignition Run / ACC #1
Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
Security – If Equipped / Under hood Lamp –
Police
Horns
Air Conditioning Clutch
Fuse – Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533
Cavity
14
15
16
18
19
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
50 Amp Red
50 Amp Red
Mini-Fuse
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
20
21
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
40 Amp Green / 20
Amp Blue – Police
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
–
–
–
22
23
24
28
–
–
–
–
Description
Fuse – Spare
Left HID – If Equipped
Right HID – If Equipped
Radiator Fan #2 – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
Electric Power Steering #2 – If Equipped / Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged)
Wiper Motor
Headlamp Washers – If Equipped
Police Bat Feed #2
Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged) /
Police Bat Feed # 3
Police Bat Feed # 1
Police Ignition Run/ACC Feed # 3
Fuse – Spare
7
534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
29
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
15 Amp Blue
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
25 Amp Clear
–
–
25 Amp Clear
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
38
–
10 Amp Red
Description
Transmission Control Module (LA/LD Police) /
Electronic Shift Module (LA)
Fuse – Spare
Engine Module
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Powertrain #1
Powertrain #2
Anti-Lock Brake Module
Engine Controller / Rad Fan Relays (LD/LX) /
Electric Power Steering Module (LD/LX) / Fuel
Pump Relay (LD/LX) / 5–Speed
Airbag Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535
Cavity
39
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red
48
–
10 Amp Red
49
50
51
52
53
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
–
Description
EPS (LA) / EHPS (Police)/AC Clutch Relay /
Vacuum Pump Relay / Fuel Pump Relay (LA)
/ Rad Fan Relays (LA)
AWD Module (LD/LX) / Front Axle Disconnect
(LD/LX) / Adaptive Cruise (LA) – If Equipped
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Vacuum Pump
Adaptive Cruise (LD/LX) – If Equipped
Fuse – Spare
7
536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Rear Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537
Cavity
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
–
60 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
15
16
40 Amp Green
20 Amp Blue
–
–
Description
Front PDC Feed #1
Fuse – Spare
Front PDC Feed #2
Sunroof
Dome Lamp – Police
Exterior Lighting #1
Exterior Lighting #2
Interior Lighting
Power Locks
Driver Door Control Module
Passenger Door Control Module
Dual USB Center Console Rear/Cigar Lighter IP –
If Equipped
HVAC Blower
Left Spot Lamp – Police
7
538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
17
18
19
20
21
22
Cartridge Fuse
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
23
24
25
26
–
–
–
–
27
31
32
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow – Police
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue –
LD/LX
25 Amp Clear
25 Amp Breaker
15 Amp Blue
Description
Fuse – Spare
Mod Network Interface – Police
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuel Pump
Right Spot Lamp – Police
Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port
Integrated Center Stack
Tire Pressure Monitor
Cygnus Transmission Module (LD/LX)
Amplifier – If Equipped
Power Seats – If Equipped
HVAC Module/Cluster
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539
Cavity
33
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
15 Amp Blue
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
10 Amp Red
5 Amp Tan
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
44
45
–
–
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
Description
Ignition Switch/RF Hub Module/Steering Column Lock (LX) – If Equipped
Steering Column Module/Clock (LX)
Battery Sensor
Electronic Exhaust Valve – If Equipped
Radio
Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest/Console Media Hub
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Rear Defrost
Comfort Seat And Steering Wheel Module
(Heated Steering Wheel/RR Heated Seats)
Park Assist / Blind Spot / Rear View Camera
Cluster / Rearview Mirror / Compass(LD/LX) /
Humidity Sensor
7
540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
46
47
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
Mini-Fuse
–
10 Amp Red
48
49
50
51
52
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
53
54
55
56
57
58
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
Description
Fuse – Spare
Adaptive Front Lighting / Auto High BEAM /
Day Time Running Lamps – If Equipped
Active Suspension – SRT
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Front Heated Seats – If Equipped
Heated Cupholders/Rear Heated Seat Switches –
If Equipped
HVAC Module/In Car Temperature Sensor
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Airbag Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541
Cavity
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
–
–
–
25 Amp Breaker
10 Amp Red
–
10 Amp Red
68
–
10 Amp Red
69
70
–
–
–
–
Description
Adjustable Pedals – Police
Heated Washer Nozzles (LD)
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Rear Windows (LD/LX)
Airbag Module
Fuse – Spare
Rain and Light Sensor / Sunroof / Inside RR
View Mirror / Power Outlet Illumination (Center
Console) / Police Run Acc Relay
Dual USB Power Outlet – R/A Sense (LD/LX)
Rear Sunshade (LD/LX)
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
7
542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the and should not be used for replacement.
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
Interior Bulbs
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
Visor Vanity Lamps
Glove Box Lamp – If Equipped
Bulb Number
W5W
562
578
A6220
194
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543
Bulb Number
Door Courtesy
562
Shift Indicator Lamp
JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Halogen Headlamp
Front Park/Turn Lamp
Front Fog Lamp
Front Side Marker
Tail Lamp
Stop/Turn Lamp
Rear Side Marker
Bulb Number
D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) *
HIR2LL
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
H11LL
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
7
544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Backup Lamp
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
License
* The headlamps are a type of high-voltage discharge
tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service.
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Bulb Number
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with Halogen
Headlamps — If Equipped
To replace the passenger side lamps:
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlamp cover.
3. Reach behind the passenger headlamp assembly.
NOTE: The park/turn lamps can also be accessed at this
point.
4. Turn the headlamp access cap counterclockwise to remove.
5. Remove bulb by turning it counter clockwise and
disconnect.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545
6. Install new bulb by turning it clockwise and reconnect. 6. Turn the headlamp access cap counterclockwise to
remove.
7. Reinstall headlamp access cap by turning it clockwise
and then reinstall headlamp cover.
7. Remove bulb by turn it counter clockwise and disconnect.
To replace the driver side lamps:
1. Open the hood.
8. Install new bulb by turning it clockwise and reconnect.
9. Reinstall headlamp access cap by turning it clockwise
2. Remove the air cleaner filter cover by removing three
and then reinstall headlamp cover.
fasteners and loosening the clean air inlet clamp and
then rotate cover off to the side.
10. Reinstall engine air cleaner assembly.
NOTE: The cover has an electrical connector that does Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and
not need to be disconnected if the cover is rotated off to Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High Intensity
the side.
Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped
3. Remove one fastener on the lower air box to remove HID Headlamps
and access the rear of the headlamp assembly.
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
4. Reach behind the passenger headlamp assembly.
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
5. Remove the headlamp cover.
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
7
546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp
an authorized dealer for service.
The Tail/Turn and Stop Lamps use LED lamps that are
not serviceable separately. The Tail/Turn and Stop
WARNING!
Lamps must be replaced as an assembly, see your authoA transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of rized dealer.
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Center Tail/Backup Lamp
The Center Tail/Backup Lamp use LED lamps that are not
serviceable separately. The Center Tail/Backup Lamp must
be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
see your authorized dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
License Lamp
The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not serviceable
The License Lamp use LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an
separately. The License Lamp must be replaced as an
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fluid Capacities — 6.2L
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol
18.5 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified
6 Quarts
Cooling System *
Engine: MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant con15 Quarts
forming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent
Intercooler: MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant con4.5 Quarts
forming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
70 Liters
5.68 Liters
14.4 Liters
4.2 Liters
7
548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Capacities — SRT 6.4L
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol
18.5 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified
7 Quarts
Cooling System *
MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
15 Quarts
MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
70 Liters
6.6 Liters
14.4 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Important Information
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
7
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine
Component
Engine/Intercooler Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032.
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine
oils.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or
equivalent MOPAR engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
Chassis
Component
Manual Transmission – If
Equipped
Automatic Transmission – If
Equipped
Hydraulic Power Steering Reservoir – If Equipped
Brake Master Cylinder
Rear Axle
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR Hydraulic System Power Steering Fluid
or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS10838.
We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If
DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE
75W85 (API GL-5).
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
8
554 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating NOTE:
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s oil
anytime a malfunction is suspected.
if it has been six months since your last oil change,
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
illuminated.
The message “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in • Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
the DID and a single chime will sound, indicating that an
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
oil change is necessary.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 555
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator • Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
as required.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
master cylinder, and power steering, and add as
referring to the steps described under “Driver Informaneeded.
tion Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
Panel” for further information.
operation.
At Each Stop For Fuel
At Each Oil Change
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Ve- • Change the engine oil filter.
hicle” for further information.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
8
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
Or
Months:
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
Or Kilometers:
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change
the engine
oil and
engine oil
filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
150,000
144,000
138,000
132,000
126,000
120,000
114,000
108,000
102,000
Miles:
10,000
556 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance Chart
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
Or
Months:
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
Or Kilometers:
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Rotate the
tires, rotate at the
first sign
of irregular
wear,
even if it
occurs
before
scheduled
maintenance.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
150,000
144,000
138,000
132,000
126,000
120,000
114,000
108,000
102,000
Miles:
10,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 557
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
8
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
Or Kilometers:
Inspect
front suspension,
tie rod
ends, and
boot
seals, for
cracks or
leaks and
all parts
for damage, wear,
improper
looseness
or end
play; replace if
necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
X
X
X
X
250,000
240,000
230,000
220,000
210,000
200,000
190,000
180,000
150,000
144,000
138,000
132,000
126,000
120,000
114,000
108,000
102,000
6,000
Or
Months:
170,000
Miles:
10,000
558 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
Or Kilometers:
If using
your vehicle for
any of the
following:
dusty or
off-road
conditions.
Inspect
the engine
air cleaner
filter; replace if
necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
X
X
X
250,000
240,000
230,000
220,000
210,000
200,000
190,000
180,000
150,000
144,000
138,000
132,000
126,000
120,000
114,000
108,000
102,000
6,000
Or
Months:
170,000
Miles:
10,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 559
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
X
8
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
Or Kilometers:
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
Inspect
the brake
linings;
replace if
necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect
the CV
joints.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect
the exhaust
system.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
250,000
240,000
230,000
220,000
210,000
200,000
190,000
180,000
150,000
144,000
138,000
132,000
126,000
120,000
114,000
108,000
102,000
6,000
Or
Months:
170,000
Miles:
10,000
560 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
Or Kilometers:
Adjust the
parking
brake on
vehicles
equipped
with four
wheel disc
brakes.
Inspect
the
manual
transmission fluid
(If
Equipped).
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
X
X
X
X
X
250,000
240,000
230,000
220,000
210,000
200,000
190,000
180,000
150,000
144,000
138,000
132,000
126,000
120,000
114,000
108,000
102,000
6,000
Or
Months:
170,000
Miles:
10,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 561
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
X
8
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
Or Kilometers:
Inspect
the rear
axle fluid.
Change
the
manual
transmission fluid
(if
equipped).
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
X
X
X
X
250,000
240,000
230,000
220,000
210,000
200,000
190,000
180,000
150,000
144,000
138,000
132,000
126,000
120,000
114,000
108,000
102,000
6,000
Or
Months:
170,000
Miles:
10,000
562 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
Or Kilometers:
Change
the rear
axle fluid if
using your
vehicle for
any of the
following:
police,
taxi, fleet
or frequent
trailer
towing.
Replace
the engine
air cleaner
filter.
X
X
X
X
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
X
X
250,000
240,000
230,000
220,000
210,000
200,000
190,000
180,000
150,000
144,000
138,000
132,000
126,000
120,000
114,000
108,000
102,000
6,000
Or
Months:
170,000
Miles:
10,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 563
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
X
8
X
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
Or Kilometers:
Replace
the air
conditioning filter.
Replace
the spark
plugs –
6.2L Supercharged
Engine **
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect
and replace the
PCV Valve
if necessary
X
X
X
X
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
X
X
X
X
X
X
250,000
240,000
230,000
220,000
210,000
200,000
190,000
180,000
150,000
144,000
138,000
132,000
126,000
120,000
114,000
108,000
102,000
6,000
Or
Months:
170,000
Miles:
10,000
564 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
Or Kilometers:
Replace
the spark
plugs –
6.4L Engine **
Flush and
replace
the engine
coolant at
120
months if
not done
at 150,000
miles
(240,000 km).
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
X
250,000
240,000
230,000
220,000
210,000
200,000
190,000
180,000
150,000
144,000
138,000
132,000
126,000
120,000
114,000
108,000
102,000
6,000
Or
Months:
170,000
Miles:
10,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 565
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
X
8
X
566 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .569
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .573
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .570
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .570
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
9
568 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .574
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 569
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
570 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FCA US LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 423-6343
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 571
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
9
572 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 573
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
operating at its best.
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: AdminisREPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
MOPAR PARTS
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
9
574 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainyou with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procecomplete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 575
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforsafety requirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
9
576 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
578 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402, 405
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .157
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Adjust
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124, 128
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124, 128
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Air Bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55, 56
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 57
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55, 56
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 94, 228
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .502
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334, 506
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips. . . . . . . . . . .332, 335
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505, 506
Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331, 505
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
INDEX 579
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 231
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . .514, 547, 548
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 33
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . .324, 331
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374, 521, 523
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523, 549, 551
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 551
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . . .380
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 551
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 551
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233, 503
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .25
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
10
580 INDEX
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 452
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .495
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Center Seat LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Capacities, Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547, 548
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 551
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405, 519
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519, 549, 551
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229, 405
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Braking Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542, 544
Bulbs, Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 542
INDEX 581
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .84
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .83
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .78
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .74
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Using The Top Tether Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Console Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .516
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547, 548
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513, 517
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514, 547, 548, 549, 550
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251, 252
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212, 530
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
10
582 INDEX
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Door Locks
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 30
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Driver Information Display
DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255, 258
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .255, 258
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Dipsticks
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Disabled Vehicle Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . .485, 486, 487 Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Door Ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
INDEX 583
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .531
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513, 549, 550
Electronic Speed Control
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
(Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 154, 157
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 452
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .235
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Emergency, In Case Of
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476, 478
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498, 547, 548, 549, 550
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476, 478
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485, 486, 487
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499, 547, 548
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .495
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492, 493
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
10
584 INDEX
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 551
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547, 548
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 452 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 510 Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .549
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334, 506 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502, 549, 550 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Flashers
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 142, 250
INDEX 585
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448, 549, 550
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 550
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547, 548
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . .196, 202
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453, 494
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
G-Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.263
.529
.456
.456
.456
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .142
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138, 148
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
10
586 INDEX
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .142
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener). . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
iPod Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Jump Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476, 478
Key Fob
Ignition
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .18, 24
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .18, 24
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . .221, 224, 232, 234, 250
INDEX 587
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 361
Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 280
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Lane Change And Turn Signals
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . .
Lap History . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.142
.142
.264
.264
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Lap Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 542
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 137
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 94, 228
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229, 405
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 195
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251, 252
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
10
588 INDEX
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .145
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 142
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 195
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137, 545
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542, 544
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . .138, 148
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .243, 442
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 141, 142, 250
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .232, 250
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455, 457
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 195
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .239
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 195
INDEX 589
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 195
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 111
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
MOPAR Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496, 573
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Maintenance Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554, 556
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .239, 495
Manual
Backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128, 129
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128, 129
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Manual Park Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367, 521, 523 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521, 523 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . .448, 549, 550
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255, 498, 549, 550
10
590 INDEX
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547, 548
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502, 549, 550
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499, 547, 548
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499, 547, 548
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 574
Paddle Shifter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Passenger Seat
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259, 289
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .427
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
INDEX 591
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .208
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Power Seats
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 551
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .516
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
10
592 INDEX
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .18, 24
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .18, 24
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .320
Remote Starting
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . . .282
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
INDEX 593
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Seat Belt
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .53
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123, 124, 126, 130
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123, 124
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 94
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124, 130
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 46, 48 Security Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 231
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
10
594 INDEX
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . .549, 550
Selection Of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
SENTRY KEY
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 142, 250
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 550
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 550
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 550
Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261, 262, 263
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155, 157
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .153, 154, 157
SRT
Console Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
G-Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Lap History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Paddle Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261, 262, 263
Top Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
INDEX 595
SRT Performance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 359
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 151
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 151
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .320
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333, 542
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .56
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Telescoping Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 151
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .331
Tilt
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Tilt Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 151
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261, 262, 263
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261, 262, 263
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .426, 427
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 431, 575
10
596 INDEX
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426, 428
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419, 431
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Tire Service Kit . . . .465, 466, 467, 470, 471, 473, 474, 475
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Top Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485, 486, 487
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .458
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Transfer Case
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372, 374, 521
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521, 549, 551
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370, 372
INDEX 597
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .25
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .24
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .22
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40, 42
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 250
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .282
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 282
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Siri Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .280
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428, 455, 457
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .19
Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333, 542
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
10
598 INDEX
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper Blades .
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 Windshield Wipers . . . . .
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Wiper Blade Replacement
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572 Wipers, Intermittent . . . .
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . .
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145, 147, 509
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Windshield Washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145, 147, 509
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.509
.509
.145
.509
.146
.148
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
16D492-126-AA
©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement